JP7764026B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventionally, slot machines have been known as gaming machines that have multiple reels, and that execute a game by causing the multiple reels to change display based on a player's start operation, and that stop the multiple reels based on the player's stop operation, and that generate specific game states depending on the stopped display state of the multiple reels. In recent years, slot machines have increasingly been equipped with display devices in addition to reels, and that display devices are designed to produce effects related to the game.
Among such gaming machines, there is also known a gaming machine that draws a lottery for a small win or a specific gaming state based on the execution of a game, and notifies the result of the lottery on a display device (Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-250129 A

However, there was room for improvement in conventional gaming machines.

In order to solve the above problem, the gaming machine of the present invention comprises lottery means capable of deriving any one of a plurality of lottery results including a first lottery result , a second lottery result , and a third lottery result; variable display means capable of statically displaying identifiers that are variably displayed in a main game in which game value can be awarded in a manner based on the lottery result derived by the lottery means; control means capable of executing the main game after executing a pseudo game in which game value cannot be awarded in a case in which the second lottery result is derived in a predetermined game; and effect execution means capable of executing any one of a plurality of effects in a state in which identifiers are not statically displayed by the variable display means, wherein the control means is capable of executing the main game in a case in which the first lottery result is derived in a specific game, and is capable of executing the main game in a case in which the third lottery result is derived in the specific game, and the effect execution means is capable of executing the main game in a case in which the third lottery result is derived in the specific game during the pseudo game of the predetermined game and in a case in which the third lottery result is derived in the specific game, and When the identification information is not displayed in a static state, any one of a plurality of effects including a first effect corresponding to the first lottery result and a third effect corresponding to the third lottery result can be executed; during the pseudo game of the specified game and when the identification information is not displayed in a static state by the variable display means, the second effect corresponding to the second lottery result cannot be executed; during the actual game of the specified game and when the identification information is not displayed in a static state by the variable display means, the second effect corresponding to the second lottery result can be executed; during the actual game of the specific game in which the first lottery result was derived and when the identification information is not displayed in a static state by the variable display means, the first effect corresponding to the first lottery result can be executed ; and during the actual game of the specific game in which the third lottery result was derived and when the identification information is not displayed in a static state by the variable display means, the third effect corresponding to the third lottery result can be executed .

1 is a schematic front view showing the appearance of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the control configuration of the gaming machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining the transition of game states in the gaming machine of the first embodiment. 10 is a diagram showing a lottery table used when determining the ceiling number of games in the main control device of the gaming machine of the first embodiment. A diagram for explaining the transition of the game state during the AT state in the gaming machine of the first embodiment. This is a diagram for explaining the additional lottery during the AT state in the gaming machine of the first embodiment. This is a diagram for explaining the additional lottery during the AT state in variant example 1 of the first embodiment. A figure showing the presentation image on the main display when an additional lottery is held during the AT state in variant example 1 of the first embodiment. A figure showing the presentation image on the main display when an additional lottery is held during the AT state in variant example 1 of the first embodiment. This is a diagram to explain the probability of executing push order navigation when the push order bell role is won during the AT state in variant example 2 of the first embodiment. A figure for explaining the transition of the game state during the AT state in variant example 3 of the first embodiment. A figure for explaining the transition of the game state during the AT state in variant example 4 of the first embodiment. A diagram to explain the transition of the game state during the CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. A flowchart for explaining the CZ state transition lottery processing in the main control device in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. A timing chart to explain the transition of probability states in response to the transition of CZ states in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. This is a diagram for explaining the probability of promotion to a CZ high probability state and the probability of demotion to a CZ low probability state in a gaming machine of the second embodiment. This is a table to explain the winning probability of the CZ state and the winning probability of the second CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. This is a chart to explain the probability of adding the number of games to the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. A figure showing the presentation image on the main display when an additional lottery is held for the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. A figure showing the presentation image on the main display during the second CZ high probability state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. A figure showing the presentation image on the main display during a CZ overlap high probability state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. A diagram for explaining the notification control of the probability state of the CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the input state of the stop button, the rotation state of the reels, and the effects of the main display when a freeze game is executed in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. 11 is a diagram for explaining the probability of selecting a freeze time in a freeze game in a gaming machine of a third embodiment. 11 is a diagram for explaining the probability of selecting a notification mode during freeze play in a gaming machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the main display when transitioning from freeze game to main game in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the main display when transitioning from freeze game to main game in variant example 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an effect image on the main display when a button effect is executed during freeze play in variant example 2 of the third embodiment. 13 is a timing chart for explaining the rotation state of the reels and the effects of the main display when a pseudo game is executed once during a freeze game in Modification 3 of the third embodiment. 13 is a timing chart for explaining the rotation state of the reels and the effects of the main display when a pseudo game is executed twice during a freeze game in Modification 3 of the third embodiment. 13 is a diagram for explaining the probability of selecting a pseudo game pattern when a pseudo game is executed twice during a freeze game in variant example 3 of the third embodiment. A timing chart to explain the transition of the game state when a CZ state occurs in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. A diagram to explain the lottery probability for transitioning to the CZ state in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. This is a timing chart to explain the transition of the game state when a special replay role is won during the CZ state in a gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, resulting in a transition to a pseudo bonus state. A figure showing the presentation image on the main display when a special replay role is won during the CZ state in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. This figure shows the presentation image on the main display when a normal replay role is won during the CZ state in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. This is a timing chart to explain the transition of the game state when a rare role is won during the CZ state in a gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, resulting in a transition to a pseudo bonus state. A figure showing the presentation image on the main display when a rare role is won during the CZ state in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. This is a chart to explain the probability of selecting a pseudo bonus state during the premonition period in the CZ state in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. 13 is a diagram for explaining the control content of the instruction effect that indicates a special symbol combination in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. 10 is a diagram for explaining the control contents of the fake instruction presentation during the premonition period in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. A diagram for explaining the results of the lottery for transitioning to the AT state when the bonus state is won in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. This is a table for explaining the results of the lottery for transition to the AT state and the results of the additional lottery for each game during the bonus state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. This is a timing chart for explaining the transition of the game state and the presentation content of the main display when the lottery for transitioning to the AT state is won during the bonus state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. A figure showing the presentation image of the main display when the bonus state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment ends or continues. A figure showing the presentation image of the main display when the AT state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment ends or continues. This is a timing chart for explaining the transition of the game state and the content of the presentation on the main display when a bonus role is won during the AT state in which a presentation corresponding to the bonus state is being executed in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. A figure showing the effect image on the main display when a bonus role is won during the AT state in which an effect corresponding to the AT state is being executed in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. A figure showing the effect image on the main display when a bonus role is won during the AT state in which an effect corresponding to the AT state is being executed in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
Here, a slot machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.
The slot machine 1 is installed in an amusement park or the like.
As shown in Figures 1 and 2, the slot machine 1 includes a front door 1a, a bet button 2a, a return button 2c, a performance button 2d, an upper performance button 2f, a medal insertion slot 2, a start lever 3, reels 4, a stop button 5, a display window 6, a medal payout device 7, a medal payout outlet 7b, a main display 8, a sub-display 17, a speaker 9, a front panel 19, a lamp 11, a navigation lamp 12, a favorable zone lamp 13, a probability setting device 14, a display decorative frame 15, a drum unit 4d, an external output terminal 18, a main control unit 10, and a sub-control unit 20.

The main control unit 10 and sub-control unit 20 each have a memory unit and a control unit, and are devices capable of various types of calculation processing and various types of control, and are included in the concept of a computer. Each memory unit has a storage device such as a semiconductor memory element that stores programs, information, etc. necessary for the operation of the slot machine 1. Each control unit has a CPU, etc. Each control unit realizes the various functions of this first embodiment by appropriately reading and executing the various programs, etc. stored in the respective memory unit.

[Front view of the gaming machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, a front door 1a is provided on the front of the slot machine 1.
The front door 1a is pivotally attached to one side (left side as viewed from the front) of the main body (not shown) which is disposed behind the front door 1a and attached to an island equipment (not shown), and is configured to be openable and closable in a single-door manner so as to be openable and closable toward the front. Note that, hereinafter, the left and right directions are indicated when the slot machine 1 is viewed from the front side.

When viewing the slot machine 1 from the front side, a main display 8 is located at the center of the upper part of the front door 1a in the left-right direction. The main display 8 is made up of a liquid crystal display or the like that can display multiple pieces of information, such as information related to effects (effect images), as will be described later, and constitutes display means.
A display decorative frame 15 having an opening in the center is arranged above the front door 1a and in front of the main display 8, and the main display 8 is arranged with its display surface facing forward through the opening of the display decorative frame 15.

Speakers 9 are provided on the left and right sides of the main display 8, and are capable of outputting, for example, sound effects corresponding to the effects displayed on the main display 8.
In addition, lamps 11 consisting of LEDs or the like are arranged on each of the left and right sides of the main display 8, and are capable of outputting, for example, light when a winning combination is achieved or light of an emission pattern corresponding to the effects displayed on the main display 8.

On the right side of the main display 8, an upper effect button 2f is provided, which is exemplified as an operation means (effect operation means).
The upper performance button 2f is a push-button that moves back and forth, and the pushing operation of the upper performance button 2f is detected by a non-contact sensor or the like and output as operation information of the upper performance button 2f to the sub-controller 20. In addition, a light-emitting source (not shown) consisting of an LED or the like is provided inside the upper performance button 2f, and the light emitted by the light-emitting source can notify that the operation of the upper performance button 2f is valid.

A flat front panel 19 having decorations and various function indications on its surface is disposed in the vertical center of the front door 1a of the slot machine 1.
Behind the front panel 19, a drum unit 4d equipped with a reel 4 as a variable display means is disposed.
In addition, a display window 6 made of a light-transmitting material is formed in the approximate center of the front panel 19, through which the symbols on the reels 4 can be seen from the front.

The reels 4 are comprised of a left reel 4a, a center reel 4b, and a right reel 4c, which are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and the rotation axes of each of the reels 4a to 4c extend in the left-right direction, with the same rotation center. The reels 4 (4a to 4c) have continuous symbols (identification information) on their peripheries, and these symbols are configured to be visible from outside the machine through a display window 6. As the reels 4 rotate in one direction, the symbols can be displayed in a variable manner, for example, from top to bottom, within the display window 6. Each of the reels 4a to 4c displays a plurality of symbols (for example, 20 symbols), and the types of symbols include, for example, "replay,""watermelon,""cherry,""bell," and "7."
The shape of the reel 4 is not limited to this, and for example, the number of symbols on the periphery may be other than 20.

Above the display window 6 on the front panel 19, navigation lamps 12a, 12b, and 12c capable of indicating the stopping order of the stop buttons 5 (described later) are arranged corresponding to the reels 4a, 4b, and 4c.
Furthermore, a favorable zone lamp 13, which may be, for example, an LED, is disposed on the lower left side of the display window 6 on the front panel 19. The favorable zone lamp 13 is controlled to light up during a favorable zone (described later). Note that, instead of the favorable zone lamp 13, the slot machine 1 may control to light up, for example, the "dot" portion of a 7-segment display (also called "7-seg") that constitutes a payout number display unit that displays the number of medals paid out.

A sub-display 17 is disposed on the front panel 19 to the right of the display window 6 (reels 4).
The sub-display 17 is configured from a liquid crystal display or the like that can display multiple pieces of information, such as information related to the effects (effect images), as will be described later, and constitutes a display means.
The sub-display 17 has a smaller display area than the main display 8, but is disposed closer to the reels 4 than the main display 8, making it easy to view the displayed image while watching the reels 4 rotate and stop.
In addition, the sub-display 17 is composed of a touch panel type display, and allows the player to perform various operations related to the presentation content by touching the screen, such as switching operations to change presentation modes and switching operations to explanatory images of the game content.

A step protruding forward is formed below the front panel 19, and on the upper surface of the step there are arranged a medal insertion slot 2, a bet button 2a which is an example of an operating means, and a performance button 2d which is an example of an operating means (performance operating means).
The medal insertion slot 2 is where the player inserts medals (game media). Inside the medal insertion slot 2, a medal selector 2b (medal detection means), which is a sensor or the like that detects medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 2, is provided.
The bet button 2a is a push button that allows the player to input the number of bets that are the conditions for starting the game, and allows the player to input the maximum number of bets allowed by the slot machine 1 with one operation.

The effect button 2d is a press-type button that moves up and down, and pressing the effect button 2d is detected by a non-contact sensor or the like and output to the sub-controller 20 as effect button 2d operation information. The effect button 2d is also provided with a light-emitting source (not shown) such as an LED inside, and the light emitted by the light-emitting source can indicate that operation of the corresponding effect button 2d is valid. The effect button 2d is positioned closer to the reel 4 than the upper effect button 2f described above.

A start lever 3, a return button 2c, and a stop button 5, which is exemplified as an operating means (stop operating means), are arranged on the front surface of the stepped portion.
The start lever 3 is a lever that the player operates to start the game. After the number of bets is input, the start lever 3 is activated and the game can be started.
The return button 2c is a push button that moves back and forth, and is operated to cancel the set bet number or to pay out medals stored as credit medals.
The stop buttons 5 are buttons for stopping the rotating reels 4, and are composed of push-type buttons that move back and forth, with the left stop button 5a, center stop button 5b, and right stop button 5c arranged at predetermined intervals horizontally corresponding to the left reel 4a, center reel 4b, and right reel 4c.
In addition, each stop button 5 is provided with a light source (not shown) such as an LED inside, which can notify the user that the operation of each stop button 5 is valid by changing the light color (from red to blue).

Below the front door 1a of the slot machine 1, there is a medal payout outlet 7b through which medals paid out from the medal payout device 7 are ejected.

[Block diagram showing the control configuration of the gaming machine]
FIG. 2 shows a block diagram of the control system in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment.
2, the slot machine 1 is equipped with a main control unit 10 that performs the lottery of winning combinations and the progress of the game, and a sub-control unit 20 that is configured to be able to communicate with the main control unit 10 and performs various performance control etc. based on control information from the main control unit 10. Transmission of control information between the main control unit 10 and the sub-control unit 20 is limited to one direction only, from the main control unit 10 to the sub-control unit 20, to prevent input of unauthorized signals from the sub-control unit 20 to the main control unit 10.

The main control device 10 is connected to the bet button 2a, medal selector 2b, return button 2c, start lever 3, stop button 5, probability setting device 14 (setting means), external output terminal 18, medal payout device 7, drum unit 4d, and advantageous zone lamp 13 via communication cables, allowing it to control each device. The main control device 10 also includes a memory unit (storage means) and a control unit.

The probability setting device 14, which serves as a setting means, changes the probability of winning in a special game state (e.g., a pseudo-bonus state) in multiple stages (e.g., six stages), thereby allowing the degree of advantage for the player to be set in multiple stages.The main control device 10 performs processing to set the probability of winning in the special game state to one of multiple probability values with different probabilities based on the probability setting operation in the probability setting device 14.
Of the setting values set by the probability setting device 14, setting 1 is the lowest probability value, the larger the number, the higher the probability value, with setting 6 being the highest. Therefore, setting 1 is the setting that is most disadvantageous to the player (the setting with the lowest degree of advantage), the larger the number, the more advantageous it is to the player, and setting 6 is the setting that is most advantageous to the player (the setting with the highest degree of advantage).

In addition, the probability of winning in the special game state may be controlled by a fixed probability value without being affected by the setting value of the probability setting device 14.
In addition, by changing the probability of transitioning to the CZ state or the AT state using the setting value in the probability setting device 14, the player's degree of advantage may be changed in multiple stages.
In addition to the special game state, the probability of winning a predetermined small role (for example, a bell role) may be made variable in multiple stages (for example, six stages).

The external output terminal 18 outputs information related to games played on the slot machine 1 to a management device (not shown) or a calling device (not shown) installed in the gaming facility. Under the control of the main control device 10, it outputs information for collecting various data such as the number of games played on the slot machine 1, the number of medals inserted, the number of medals paid out, the number of times a game state advantageous to the player occurs (for example, the pseudo-bonus state or AT state described below) and the transition period.

The drum unit 4d is a device that integrally includes reels 4a to 4c and stepping motors (not shown) that rotate the reels 4a to 4c.
The medal payout device 7 has a medal storage section (not shown) that collects medals inserted into the medal selector 2b as medals before being paid out, and is a device that pays out medals stored in the medal storage section to a medal payout outlet 7b. The medal payout device 7 is equipped with a sensor that detects the paid-out medals.
The medal selector 2 b is provided downstream of the medal insertion port 2 and is equipped with a sensor that detects medals inserted through the medal insertion port 2 .

The memory unit of the main control device 10 stores various information such as game programs related to the game, tables for drawing lots for small winning combinations and AT states, etc.
The main control device 10 also operates using a control unit and a storage unit that stores programs, thereby performing processes related to the progress of play on the slot machine 1.

Based on the signal from the start lever 3, the main control unit 10 performs processes such as starting the game and sampling random numbers from a random number generator (not shown). It then performs lottery processing for winning combinations based on the sampled random numbers. It also performs random number generation processing, for example by updating the random numbers at predetermined times, in accordance with the control program in the storage unit, and performs lottery processing for transitioning to a pseudo-bonus state, lottery processing for transitioning to an AT state, lottery processing for adding bonuses to an AT state, etc., based on the generated random numbers.

That is, the main control device 10 is provided with a lottery means for drawing (determining) whether or not to award a special benefit such as a small win, a pseudo bonus state, or an AT state in response to the execution of a game.
In addition, the lottery patterns using random numbers may be other than those mentioned above, and the winning combination may be selected based on random numbers generated by software, and the transition to a pseudo-bonus state or AT state, or additional selection may be performed based on random numbers generated by a random number generator, or all selections may be performed using random numbers generated by software or random numbers generated by a random number generator.

The main control device 10 also controls the rotation of the reels 4 based on signals from the start lever 3. The main control device 10 detects the rotational position of each reel 4a, 4b, 4c based on signals from sensors (not shown) provided on each reel 4a, 4b, 4c, and is able to grasp the rotational position of the symbols on each reel 4a, 4b, 4c. Then, based on signals from the stop button 5, it controls the desired symbols to stop within the display window 6.

In addition, the main control device 10 realizes game play on the slot machine 1 by controlling game progress processing involving internal lottery processing, management of various information stored in the memory unit, and devices such as the medal payout device 7 in response to operation of operating units such as the start lever 3.

The sub-controller 20 is connected to the effect button 2d, upper effect button 2f, speaker 9, main display 8, lamp 11, navigation lamp 12, and sub-display 17 via a communication cable, allowing communication. The sub-controller 20 controls these devices in accordance with control information from the main controller 10. The sub-controller 20 also includes a memory unit and a control unit.

The storage unit of the sub-controller 20 stores various information such as programs related to performance, performance image data, and audio data.
The sub-controller 20 operates using a control unit and a storage unit that stores programs, and performs processing such as effects synchronized with play on the slot machine 1 in response to commands (control information) from the main controller 10. For example, it controls the main display 8, lamps 11, speaker 9, etc. to output effect images and sound effects that indicate a transition in the game state, and lamp effects.

In addition, the sub-controller 20 can control the switching timing of each effect based on signals from the effect button 2d, the upper effect button 2f, and the touch panel of the sub-display 17.
Either one or both of the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 constitute the special game state control means, special game state switching control means, change lottery control means, bonus awarding means, notification control means, game control means, extended lottery control means, probability control means, duplicate notification control means, state notification control means, lottery means, game control means, freeze game control means, specific notification control means, special game state occurrence determination means, first game control means, second game control means, special game state right awarding means, game result derivation means, specific game state control means, presentation control means, bonus lottery means, notification change control means, special presentation control means, second special game state control means, end instruction presentation control means, mid-game instruction presentation control means, and bonus awarding presentation control means in the present invention.

Such a slot machine 1 is configured to be able to execute the following slot machine games under the control of the main control device 10.

At the start of the game, medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 2, or the number of bets is set from credit medals by operating the bet button 2a.
Then, when the number of bets reaches a predetermined number (for example, three coins), one of the conditions for starting the game is met, and the player enters a state in which the right to play one game is held and the game can be started.

In this state where the game can be started, operation of the start lever 3 is valid. When the start lever 3 is tilted in this valid state, all of the conditions for starting the game are met, the game starts, and the reels 4a to 4c displaying multiple symbols begin to move, and an internal lottery process is executed to determine in advance, before the reels 4 stop, the lottery results for the current game regarding multiple roles (including misses) such as replay roles, small roles, and bonus roles, as well as transitions to pseudo bonus and AT states.
In the internal lottery process, a winning combination for the current game is determined by lottery from among a plurality of winning combinations based on a predetermined probability of winning. For example, a winning combination such as a replay combination or a bell combination is derived by lottery.

Furthermore, even if the main control device 10 receives a signal from the start lever 3, if a predetermined time (e.g., 4.1 seconds) has not yet elapsed since the start of rotation of the reels 4 in the previous game, the main control device 10 temporarily waits (inserts a waiting time) before the start of rotation of the reels 4, thereby delaying the start of rotation of the reels 4 and limiting the number of games played per unit time (e.g., one minute) to a predetermined number (e.g., 14 games). In other words, the main control device 10 is equipped with a game number limiting means that can limit the number of games played per unit time to a predetermined number. This control limits the shortest execution time required for one game to a predetermined time (e.g., 4.1 seconds).
The period for monitoring the above-mentioned shortest execution time may be set based on a point other than the point at which the reel 4 starts to rotate between games. For example, it may be based on the point at which the stop button 5 is activated, or any point at which the number of games per unit time can be monitored.

Each of the reels 4a to 4c is an example of a display means, and a number of symbols (replay, bell, watermelon, cherry, BAR, 7) are displayed in a predetermined arrangement on the periphery of each of the reels 4a to 4c. The rotation speed gradually increases from a stopped state, and then reaches a steady state where the reels rotate at a constant speed.
When the reels reach this steady rotation, the stop buttons 5a to 5c provided corresponding to the reels 4a to 4c become operable to be pressed.

When each of the stop buttons 5a to 5c is pressed in this state, the reels 4a to 4c are controlled to stop with a combination of symbols allowed by the timing of the operation and the result of the internal lottery process.
The stop control (pull-in stop control) of each reel 4a to 4c has a pull-in range set for each, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of symbols in the reverse rotation direction (upward) from the symbol at the time of the stop operation can be pulled in, and only any of the symbols within this pull-in range can be stopped on an active line.

In the stopped state, three consecutive symbols displayed in the vertical direction on each of the reels 4a to 4c stop (stop display) so that they face the outside of the machine through the display window 6, and whether or not a prize has been won is determined based on the stopped display state at this time.
Winning is determined based on the combination of symbols that stop on the middle winning line that connects the middle symbols of each reel 4 in the display window 6. Therefore, even if predetermined symbols line up on a diagonal line, for example, winning is determined based on the combination of symbols that are actually stopped in the middle row at that time but are not lined up.

Winning of a winning combination such as a small combination or a replay combination is determined based on the combination of symbols on such a winning line.
Small roles include, for example, bell role, watermelon role, and cherry role.

There are two types of bell roles, each with a different corresponding symbol combination. For example, there can be a common bell role where the corresponding symbol combination is "bell, replay, bell" in the order of "left reel 4a, middle reel 4b, right reel 4c" on the pay line (and so on), and a push-order bell role where the corresponding symbol combination is "bell, bell, bell."

The common bell role is a minor role in which the corresponding symbol combination ("bell, replay, bell") stops regardless of the order in which the stop buttons 5a to 5c are operated (called the push order), while the push order bell role is a minor role in which the corresponding symbol combination ("bell, bell, bell") stops when a specific push order is followed.

Furthermore, the push order bell role includes six push order bell roles 1-6, in which the corresponding symbol combination ("Bell Bell Bell") is displayed when the stop buttons 5a-5c are operated in one of six possible push orders (e.g., "5a → 5b → 5c", "5c → 5b → 5a", etc.) (a specific push order). When the stop buttons 5a-5c of these push order bell roles 1-6 are operated in five other push orders (a push order other than the specific push order), the corresponding symbol combination ("Bell Bell Bell") is not displayed, and instead another symbol combination such as "Bell Bell Replay" (called a "Bell Spill") is displayed instead.

When the Push Order Bell role is won, regardless of which stop button 5 is operated second or third, as long as only the first stop button 5 is operated in a specific press order, the reels 4 may be controlled to stop with a combination of symbols corresponding to the Push Order Bell role. Furthermore, the number of Push Order Bell combinations is not limited to six, and three Push Order Bell combinations (1 to 3) may be provided.

The watermelon role is a small role (rare role) where the corresponding symbol combination is "watermelon, watermelon, watermelon", and there are weak watermelon roles where "watermelon, watermelon, watermelon" stops on the upper or lower line, and strong watermelon roles where "watermelon, watermelon, watermelon" stops on the upward-to-right or downward-to-right line.
The cherry role is a minor role (rare role) in which the corresponding symbol combination is "cherry, any, any," and there are two types of cherry roles: a weak cherry role in which "cherry" stops on the top or bottom row of the left reel 4a, and a strong cherry role in which "cherry" stops on the middle row of the left reel 4a.

There are two replay roles with different corresponding symbol combinations, a normal replay role (hereinafter referred to as a replay role) with a corresponding symbol combination of "replay, replay, replay" and a chance replay role (chance role) with a corresponding symbol combination of "replay, bell, bell".
"Replay Bell Bell" (Chance Eye) is a combination of symbols that stops and is displayed when a Chance Replay symbol is won, and along with the Watermelon symbol and the Cherry symbol, it is set as a so-called rare symbol with a relatively low probability of winning in the internal lottery process, and among them, the Weak Watermelon symbol and the Weak Cherry symbol are set as weak rare symbols, and symbols other than the Weak Watermelon symbol and the Weak Cherry symbol are set as strong rare symbols.

In addition, the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 can generate an AT (assist time) as a game state related to the push order bell role. When the push order bell role is won, the AT is a state in which the push order of the won push order bell role is notified (push order navigation is executed) by the main display 8 and the navigation lamp 12.
In other words, the sub-control device 20 constitutes notification control means capable of executing control to notify operation information (specific operation information) for deriving a specific result ("Bell Bell Bell") as the result of the game.
Therefore, the occurrence of an AT allows the player to easily win medals, and is controlled during the pseudo-bonus state and AT state described below.
The navigation lamp 12 may be configured to be directly drive-controllable by the main control device 10 without going through the sub-control device 20.

Based on the combination of symbols as explained above, the winning of a small role, a replay role, or a bonus role is judged (judgment means), and when the result of the judgment is that the combination of symbols corresponds to each of the above, a win is made and a game value according to the establishment of each win is awarded.
For example, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a small prize such as a bell, cherry, or watermelon stops, it is determined that a small prize has been won, and the medal payout device 7 is driven and controlled to pay out a predetermined number of medals through the medal payout opening 7b.

Specifically, in the case of a bell role (common bell role, push order bell role), when a combination of corresponding symbols is stopped and displayed, eight medals are paid out.
Furthermore, when the push order bell role is won, if the stop buttons 5a to 5c are operated in a push order other than the specific push order (five different push orders), no medals will be paid out.
When the push order bell role is won, if the stop buttons 5a to 5c are operated in a push order other than the specific push order (five different push orders), fewer than eight medals (for example, one medal) may be paid out, or for some push orders other than the specific push order, fewer than eight medals (for example, one medal) may be paid out, and for other push orders, no medals may be paid out.
In addition, the probability of winning the bell role is set so that the number of medals held by the player increases during the AT state described below.

In addition, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a weak watermelon role and a strong watermelon role is stopped and displayed, two medals are paid out.
In addition, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a weak cherry role and a strong cherry role is stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out.
The number of medals paid out when a combination of symbols corresponding to each winning combination is stopped and displayed may be other than the above-mentioned number.

In addition, the replay and chance replay roles are determined by the stopped display of symbol combinations corresponding to the replay and chance replay roles, and the next game can be played with the same number of bets as set in the previous game without inserting medals (without setting a number of bets).

In addition, the winning probability of each small role and replay role is set so that, for each setting value, the relationship is Bell role > Replay role > Weak Cherry role > Weak Watermelon role > Chance Replay role > Strong Cherry role > Strong Watermelon role, meaning that Bell role is the easiest to win and Strong Watermelon role is the hardest to win.
The relationship between the winning probabilities of each role may be other than that described above.

[Transition of gaming state in gaming machine]
Next, the transition of the gaming state in the slot machine 1 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In the slot machine 1 of this first embodiment, it is possible to play a 3-bet game in which three medals are spent (three bets are made) to play the game, and Figure 3 shows the transition of the game state when a 3-bet game is played, which is realized by the control of the main control unit 10.
In this first embodiment, the transition of the game state is controlled only when a three-bet game is executed, and the game state is not transitioned for other games (for example, two-bet games). However, it is also possible to allow the execution of the game itself only when three bets are placed, and to prohibit the execution of the game for other bet numbers.
Hereinafter, the 3-bet game will be referred to as the "game."

As shown in Figure 3, gameplay on the slot machine 1 of this first embodiment is carried out in multiple game states: normal game state, CZ state, pseudo bonus state, and AT state. The main control device 10 is capable of controlling the transition from one game state to another game state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition.

Furthermore, the main control device 10 of the first embodiment is provided with a zone control means that can control the gaming zone to either a normal zone or an advantageous zone, in addition to the above-mentioned gaming state.
The normal zone is a game zone in which push order navigation is not executed, and begins when the next game starts after the advantageous zone ends, and ends when the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous zone are met.
In the normal zone, the advantageous zone lamp 13 is controlled to be off.

In addition, in the normal zone, when the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous zone are met, for example, when a predetermined role (for example, a bell role) is won in an internal lottery, it is determined that the player will transition to the advantageous zone.
In addition, the transition condition to the AT state may be established based on the winning of a predetermined rare role in the normal zone, and in this case, it is preferable to transition to the AT state after the establishment of the advantageous zone transition condition. Therefore, since the push order navigation will be executed after the establishment of the advantageous zone transition condition, the push order navigation will not be performed in the normal zone.
Furthermore, when the main control device 10 is reset, it is controlled to the normal section.

The advantageous zone is a game zone in which push order navigation may be performed, and is a game zone that is more advantageous to the player than the normal zone because push order navigation may be performed.
In addition, the advantageous zone begins when the next game starts after the advantageous zone transition condition is met in the normal zone, and ends when a predetermined advantageous zone end condition is met.
In the favorable zone, the favorable zone lamp 13 is controlled to be lit.
In addition, after transitioning to the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone lamp 13 may start to light up when the game state (e.g., pseudo-bonus state) is reached in which the number of medals held by the player increases due to the execution of the push order navigation.

In addition, the advantageous zone transitions to the normal zone when the end condition of the advantageous zone is met based on the end of a specific game state among the multiple game states mentioned above.
Examples of conditions for the end of the advantageous period include the end of a pseudo-bonus state that does not transition to an AT state or the end of the AT state.
In addition, the conditions for ending the advantageous zone may not be met at a part of the end of the pseudo-bonus state that does not transition to the AT state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the advantageous zone include when the number of games played in one advantageous zone (advantageous zone game count) reaches the upper limit (for example, 3,000 games), and when the net increase in medals (difference in medals), which indicates the increase in the number of medals held by the player in one advantageous zone, exceeds the upper limit (for example, 2,400 medals).When the advantageous zone ends, the game state also transitions to the normal game state.The advantageous zone ends when at least one of the three end conditions above is met.

In particular, the number of games played in the advantageous zone mentioned above reaching the upper limit (maximum number), and the net increase in the number of medals played in the advantageous zone reaching the upper limit are provided as restriction functions (so-called limiters) to restrict the amount of medals that can be acquired by the player, making it possible to curb gambling.
The main control unit 10 counts the number of games played up to the maximum number of games for normal games only, and does not count pseudo-games that are executed separately from normal games as part of the number of games played, as will be described in more detail below.

In other words, the main control device 10 is equipped with a counting means that counts the number of times that normal games (number of games in the advantageous zone) are played in the advantageous zone, but does not count the number of times that pseudo games are played.
Furthermore, the main control device 10 as a zone control means transitions the game zone to a normal zone when the counting result by the counting means indicates the upper limit number of games (specific number of times) in the advantageous zone.

Furthermore, in this first embodiment, for example, the activation of the above-mentioned limiting function during the AT state is determined in advance, and the period from this determination until the limiter is activated is set as the ending period, and an effect (completion effect) is executed to congratulate the player in advance that the advantageous state has continued to the upper limit.
Furthermore, in the first embodiment, as will be described in detail later, pseudo games are made impossible to execute during the ending period, so as to prevent players from having unnecessary expectations.

In addition, the slot machine 1 of this first embodiment controls the transition between the normal zone, which is an area where the push order navigation cannot be performed, and the advantageous zone, which is an area where the push order navigation can be performed, based on the execution of the game. The slot machine 1 is initially controlled to the normal zone, and when a game is executed in the normal zone, if a predetermined transition condition is met (for example, a bell role is won), the transition to the advantageous zone will occur.

(Normal gameplay state)
The normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the player remains when the main controller 10 of the slot machine 1 is reset, and is a disadvantageous state for the player.
3, the main control device 10 performs a lottery process for transitioning to the CZ state, pseudo bonus state, and AT state while in the normal gaming state. Note that, depending on the specifications of the slot machine 1, it may not be possible to transition directly from the normal gaming state to the AT state.
In the normal game state, such as when the main control device 10 of the slot machine 1 is reset, the game zone is controlled to the normal zone, and when the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous zone during the normal game state are met, the game zone transitions from the normal zone to the advantageous zone.

In addition, the normal game state is divided into a normal probability state and a high probability state, and in each game, the probability of transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state is controlled so that it is higher in the high probability state than in the normal probability state.

The transition of the probability state is controlled so that, for example, when a weak watermelon or weak cherry symbol is hit, there is a 30% probability of transitioning from the normal probability state to the high probability state. On the other hand, as a predetermined fall condition, there is a 5% probability of transitioning from the high probability state to the normal probability state, for example, when a replay symbol, a bell symbol, or a miss symbol is hit.

The winning probability in the pseudo bonus state is set to, for example, 20% when a chance role or a strong cherry role is won in the normal probability state, and to 50% when a chance role or a strong cherry role is won in the high probability state.
When the probability state changes from a normal probability state to a high probability state, the sub-controller 20 controls the main display 8 to notify the player that the state is high probability. For example, if a stage in which the main character is moving through a grassland is displayed during normal gameplay, the background of the stage is changed from a daytime background to an evening background to notify the player that the state is high probability.

However, instead of definitely changing the stage when the high probability state is reached, a stage change lottery is held with a predetermined probability (for example, 30%) during the game when the high probability state is reached, and the stage is changed only if the change lottery is won.
In addition, even in a game in a normal probability state, a lottery for changing to a stage is held with a predetermined probability (2%), and if this change lottery is won, control is exercised to change to a stage indicating a high probability state.

On the other hand, even when staying on a stage with an evening background, a lottery for changing to a daytime background is held, and control is performed so that in a game in a normal probability state, the change lottery is won with a relatively high probability (for example, 20%), and in a game in a high probability state, the change lottery is won with a relatively low probability (for example, 5%).
Therefore, even if the stage has an evening background, it does not necessarily mean that the player is in a high probability state; a stage with an evening background merely indicates a high probability state.

In addition, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is changed or the main control device 10 is reset, the game will move through the normal zone and then to the advantageous zone, and then actual play can begin in the normal game state in the normal probability state.However, for each setting value in the probability setting device 14, the normal game state may be started in a high probability state with a predetermined probability.
In addition, during the high probability state, in addition to the pseudo bonus state, the probability of winning the CZ state or AT state may be increased.

Furthermore, in a game during the normal gaming state, a pseudo game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a game is executed to notify the transition to a predetermined gaming state (for example, a pseudo bonus state).
In addition, a lottery for transition to the above-mentioned benefits (CZ state, pseudo bonus state, AT state) may also be conducted based on pseudo-game play.

During the normal game state, an individual effect that is completed in one game is executed on the main display 8 or the sub-display 17 with a predetermined probability.
The individual effects are mainly performed to heighten the player's sense of anticipation, and include winning effects that are performed based on the results of the lottery for winning combinations in the main control device 10.
In addition, individual effects also include those that are executed based on the probability state at that time (normal probability state or high probability state), and those that are executed to explain the game.
The winning effect is an effect that is mainly executed to notify the results of the lottery for a winning role, and displays an item that can notify the winning role (for example, a rare role) when a specified character appears, or displays text information such as ``Chance'' or ``Super Hot'' when a specified character appears, indicating the expectation of the occurrence of a special role (such as a pseudo-bonus state), and is an effect that displays an image according to the type of winning role and the lottery result related to the granting of a special role triggered by the winning role (for example, a rare role).

Transition process from normal game state to pseudo bonus state (arrow a1 in FIG. 3)
The number of games is counted as games are played during the normal game state (advantageous zone), and when the number of times the game is played reaches a predetermined number (special number: ceiling game number), a transition from the normal game state to the pseudo-bonus state is made.
The ceiling number of games is determined when the game zone transitions from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, and as will be described in detail later, the ceiling number of games at that time is set each time the zone transitions to the advantageous zone.

In addition, when a game is played during normal game mode, a lottery is held to transition to the pseudo-bonus state when a predetermined combination is won, and if the transition lottery is won with a predetermined probability, a transition from normal game mode to the pseudo-bonus state will also occur.

More specifically, the main control device 10 performs a lottery process for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state in advance based on the winning of a predetermined rare combination as a specific lottery result. For example, the process for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 20%) when a chance combination or a strong cherry combination is won.
The pseudo bonus state continues until a predetermined number of games have been played, during which a lottery to transition to the AT state is held. The pseudo bonus state will be described in detail later.

In addition, in normal game mode, the probability of entering the pseudo bonus state when a specified rare role is won can be changed according to the setting value in the probability setting device 14, which serves as a setting means. For example, when a strong cherry role is won, the probability of entering the pseudo bonus state is 10% for setting 1, 12% for setting 2, 14% for setting 3, 16% for setting 4, 18% for setting 5, and 20% for setting 6.

The decision to transition to the pseudo bonus state, i.e., whether or not to award a bonus, may be made by a method other than playing a maximum number of games or drawing a lottery for a rare role using a lottery means. For example, the decision to transition to the pseudo bonus state may be made when a predetermined role (e.g., a bell role) has been won (or actually won) a predetermined number of times, and a lottery for the pseudo bonus state may be held at that time. Alternatively, predetermined points may be added depending on the role drawn, and the points added may be changeable depending on the type of role won and the state in which the role is won, and a decision to transition to the pseudo bonus state may be made when a predetermined number of points have been reached, or a lottery for the pseudo bonus state may be held at that time.

In addition, a pseudo bonus state may be generated during the AT state described below.
In addition, in the first embodiment, the winning combinations that trigger the pseudo bonus state are set to be chance combinations and strong cherry combinations, but the pseudo bonus state may also be drawn when other combinations are won.

During a predetermined period immediately before the number of games played reaches the ceiling number of games, and if the player wins the lottery to transition to the pseudo-bonus state, a premonition effect (first specific effect) is executed on the main display 8 for a predetermined number of games (e.g., 18 games) to notify the player that they will eventually transition to the pseudo-bonus state, in order to heighten the player's anticipation for the transition to the pseudo-bonus state.

In other words, even if the main control unit 10 has previously decided to transition to the pseudo bonus state, it does not immediately transition to the pseudo bonus state, but rather generates the pseudo bonus state after a predetermined number of games have been played from that point onwards, and the sub-control unit 20, based on the main control unit 10's prior decision to generate the pseudo bonus state, controls the execution of this premonition effect as a premonition effect during the period of a predetermined number of games played before transitioning to the pseudo bonus state.
Therefore, when a transition to a pseudo-bonus state is predetermined as a bonus award, the sub-controller 20 is capable of executing this premonition effect across multiple games during a predetermined period before the bonus is awarded.

In addition, before the ceiling number of games is reached and when the pseudo-bonus state is determined by the transition lottery, a waiting period of a predetermined number of games (e.g., 12 games) is set in the period immediately before this premonition effect is executed, and this premonition effect is executed after the end of this waiting period.
During the waiting period, for example, the probability of an individual effect being executed is increased, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the execution of the premonition effect.
Therefore, when transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state, the transition will occur after a waiting period and the execution of this premonition effect.

During this premonition effect, the main display 8 switches to a stage image with a different background than that during the normal game state, and a premonition stage effect image is executed in which the character performs actions different from those during the normal game state. For example, an effect on the premonition stage in which a character advances through a cave is executed throughout multiple games. The effect content itself does not change even after one game ends. For example, even if the screen is switched due to the occurrence of various events in a given game, the effect content itself, such as a character advancing through a cave, continues to be executed in the next game without change. Therefore, this premonition effect is a series of effects executed across (spanning) multiple games.
In addition, multiple patterns with different backgrounds, etc. are prepared for the premonition stage, and one of the patterns of the premonition stage is selected under the control of the sub-controller 20 depending on whether or not a win has been made in the pseudo-bonus state at that time.

In addition, when the number of games played is not about to reach the ceiling number of games, and when a rare role (e.g., a chance role) that triggers a transition to the pseudo bonus state is won but the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state is not won, a fake premonition effect (second specific effect) is executed on the main display 8 for a predetermined number of games (e.g., 18 games) to notify players that they will not ultimately transition to the pseudo bonus state, just as when they win the pseudo bonus state.

In other words, the sub-controller 20 is capable of executing a fake premonition effect as a specific effect (second specific effect) across multiple games based on the establishment of a predetermined condition when the main controller 10 has not previously decided to transition to a pseudo-bonus state.
Therefore, regardless of whether the main control unit 10 has previously decided to transition to a pseudo-bonus state, the sub-control unit 20 is capable of executing a specific effect (a real premonition effect or a fake premonition effect) across multiple games that can indicate whether or not a bonus will be awarded when a predetermined condition such as winning a chance role is met.

In addition, the fake premonition effect may be performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%) when a rare role that triggers a transition to the pseudo bonus state is won but the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is not won, or it may be performed always.
Furthermore, when executing a fake premonition effect at a time when the number of games played is not immediately before reaching the ceiling number of games, it is preferable to execute the fake premonition effect in accordance with a period (zone) in which a preset ceiling number of games is likely to be selected.In this way, when the period in which the ceiling number of games is likely to be selected is reached, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation even if the game does not transition to a pseudo-bonus state.

Also, when a fake premonition effect is executed based on the winning of a rare role, a fake waiting period of a predetermined number of games (for example, 12 games) is set in the period immediately before the fake premonition effect is executed, just as when a pseudo bonus state is won.
The real premonition effects and fake premonition effects are basically made up of a series of effects across multiple games in which the effect images (stages or characters that appear, etc.) are set in the same way, and by making the content that is finally announced different, it is possible to keep the player's expectations captivated until the very end.

In addition, in the actual premonition effects and fake premonition effects, a notification is made as to whether or not the game will ultimately transition to a pseudo-bonus state. In this case, the main display 8 executes a continuous effect (continuous effect) starting several games (e.g., two games) before the final game of the premonition effect. The continuous effect is executed, for example, as a battle effect consisting of images of an ally character and an enemy character fighting for a predetermined number of games (e.g., three games).

In the continuous performance (battle performance), a performance image is executed in which a friendly character and an enemy character compete in a predetermined battle event for each game, and the performance content of each game is carried over to the next game. For example, if a given friendly character is in a disadvantageous situation in a predetermined game, a performance is executed to carry over that situation to the next game, and ultimately a performance is executed in which one of the characters wins.
In addition, in the continuous performance (battle performance), the type of ally character that appears, the type of enemy character, and the type of battle event may be changed depending on whether or not a transition to a pseudo-bonus state occurs.

In addition, the content of the battle between ally characters and enemy characters in each game is set depending on whether or not there is a transition to a predetermined pseudo-bonus state, and for example, when there is a transition to the pseudo-bonus state, there are more games in which the ally characters have the advantage than when there is no transition.
In other words, the continuous effects are a series of effects that are executed over (across) multiple games.
In addition, a button effect may be executed in parallel with the continuous effect.

If a transition to the pseudo-bonus state occurs (in the case of this precursor effect), an image of the ally character ultimately winning will be displayed to notify the transition to the pseudo-bonus state, and if a transition to the pseudo-bonus state does not occur (in the case of a fake precursor effect), an image of the ally character ultimately losing will be displayed to notify the transition to the pseudo-bonus state.

In addition, instead of a continuous effect, an effect may be executed that is completed with only the final game of the main premonition effect and the fake premonition effect, and a notification regarding a transition to a pseudo bonus state may be given based on the result of that effect.
In addition, the real sign effect and the fake sign effect may be generated without executing the waiting period. In addition, the fake sign effect may be generated always when a rare combination that triggers a transition to the pseudo bonus state is won, or may be generated with a predetermined probability.
In addition, after winning a rare role, only the continuous effects during this premonition effect may be executed to transition to a pseudo bonus state or the like.
The number of games for the real premonition effects and the fake premonition effects may be any number of games, or may be selectively determined from a plurality of numbers of games (e.g., 15 to 20 games).Similarly, the waiting period may be selectively determined from a plurality of numbers of games (e.g., 10 to 15 games), so that the waiting period can be varied.

The number of games that can be selected for the execution period of the real premonition effect and the fake premonition effect may be set to the same, but it may also be possible to select a number of games that would not be selected for the fake premonition effect during the real premonition effect. In this way, if the premonition effect ends after a small number of games that would be impossible for a fake premonition effect, or if the premonition effect continues for a large number of games that would be impossible for a fake premonition effect, the real premonition effect will be confirmed, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

・Transition process from normal gaming state to CZ state (arrow c1 in FIG. 3)
In the normal game state, the main control device 10 performs a lottery process for transitioning to the CZ state based on the winning of a predetermined rare combination. For example, the transition process to the CZ state is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 10%) when a strong watermelon combination is won. The condition for transitioning to the CZ state is winning this transition lottery.

In addition, in order to heighten the player's anticipation for the transition to the CZ state, even if a specified rare combination is won and a transition to the CZ state is determined, the transition to the CZ state may not occur immediately, but rather a continuous CZ state presentation (main continuous presentation) may be executed on the main display 8 for a specified number of games (e.g., 3 games) to notify the player that they will eventually transition to the CZ state.

In addition, even if a player wins a specified rare combination but does not win the lottery to transition to the CZ state, the main display 8 may execute a fake continuous CZ state performance for a specified number of games (e.g., three games) to notify the player that they will not ultimately transition to the CZ state. In this case, the characters that appear in the CZ state continuous performance and the fake continuous performance may basically be set to be the same, but the content of the final notification may be different, thereby keeping the player's expectations captivated until the very end.

For example, as a continuous CZ state effect (or fake continuous effect), an effect image may be executed in which a character competes in a sporting event throughout each game. In this case, during the continuous effect (or fake continuous effect), sporting events are played continuously throughout the games in between, and if the CZ state is achieved, the character ultimately succeeds in the event (for example, scoring a goal in soccer), and if the CZ state is not achieved, an effect image is executed in which the character fails the event.

・Transition process from normal gaming state to AT state (arrow g1 in FIG. 3)
In the normal game state, the main control device 10 performs a lottery process for transitioning to the AT state based on the winning of a predetermined rare combination. For example, when a strong cherry combination is won, the transition process to the AT state is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1%). The condition for transitioning to the AT state is winning this transition lottery.
In addition, the transition to the AT state in the normal game state may be made on the condition that a predetermined rare role is won, or may be made with a predetermined probability (for example, 1%) when a losing lottery result is derived in which no small role is won.

In this first embodiment, the transition to the AT state is mainly performed via a pseudo-bonus state in order to increase the player's sense of anticipation, and therefore the probability of transitioning directly from the normal game state to the AT state is set to an extremely low probability.
In addition, the probability of transitioning directly from the normal game state to the AT state may be made changeable depending on the set probability in the probability setting device 14, or it may be possible to win the lottery for transitioning directly from the normal game state to the AT state only in the case of a relatively high set value (for example, setting 4 to 6).
Furthermore, if the player wins the lottery to transition to the AT state during normal gameplay, a waiting period is inserted and a premonition effect is executed, just as when the pseudo-bonus state described above occurs, and the AT state occurs after the premonition effect ends.

In addition, when the lottery for transitioning directly from the normal game state to the AT state is won, the selection of premonition effects may be controlled differently from when the pseudo-bonus state occurs. For example, when transitioning directly to the AT state, the selection rate of premonition effects consisting of characters and backgrounds that have a low appearance rate (or do not appear at all) in fake premonition effects may be made higher than when the pseudo-bonus state occurs. Also, premonition effects that are not executed when the pseudo-bonus state occurs may be executed only when transitioning directly to the AT state.

(CZ state)
In the CZ state, push order navigation is not performed when the push order bell role is won, but the lottery process for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is performed with a higher probability in each game than in the normal game state, so it is a game state in which it is easier to transition to the pseudo bonus state than when staying in the normal game state.
Although push order navigation is not performed when the push order bell role is won, push order navigation may be performed when the push order bell role is won, or push order navigation may be performed only partially when the push order bell role is won, i.e., with a predetermined probability (for example, 40%) when the push order bell role is won.

Since it is easier to transition to a pseudo-bonus state while in the CZ state than while in the normal game state, the CZ state is positioned as a chance zone in the flow of the game.
The number of times that can be played in the CZ state is the minimum number of games, 10 games, and after the 10th game, a lottery to end the CZ state is held by the main control device 10, and if the lottery to end the CZ state is won, the CZ state will end with that game.
During the CZ state, control information regarding the CZ state is sent from the main control unit 10 to the sub-control unit 20, and under the control of the main control unit 10 and the sub-control unit 20, various effects and the number of remaining games during the CZ state are displayed on the main display unit 8.

・Transition process from CZ state to pseudo bonus state (arrow e1 in Figure 3)
In the CZ state, a lottery process to transition to a pseudo bonus state is performed in each game.
The winning probability of the lottery process for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is set according to the winning role of each game. The winning probability of the lottery process for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is, for example, 50% when a rare role is won, 10% when a bell role or a replay role is won, and 5% when a miss occurs. The lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is conducted for each game in the CZ state, but whether or not to transition to the pseudo bonus state is determined in the final game of the CZ state, and if a transition to the pseudo bonus state is announced in the final game, the game state will transition to the pseudo bonus state, just like in the normal game state.

In other words, the CZ state is similar to the high probability state described above in that the probability of transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state is higher than in the normal game state, but in the CZ state, there is a possibility of transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state even with roles that do not trigger the transition to the pseudo-bonus state in the normal game state (bell roles and replay roles), so it is a more advantageous state for the player than the high probability state.
The lottery for transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state is executed when an internal win is achieved for each role, so the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state is executed even if the symbol corresponding to the winning role does not stop on reel 4 (when a miss occurs).
Also, when the CZ state ends and the game transitions to a pseudo-bonus state, the game zone continues as an advantageous zone.

In addition, the winning probability of the pseudo bonus state for some or all of the winning roles may be other than those described above. In addition, the transition lottery trigger role to the pseudo bonus state during the CZ state may be other than those described above.
Furthermore, although the lottery process for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is performed when the bell role is won, the lottery process for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state may be performed based on the winning of a symbol corresponding to the bell role.

Also, during the CZ state, a CZ state image is displayed on the main display 8, allowing the player to recognize that they are in the CZ state throughout the game during that CZ state.
In addition, when a game that wins the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state is played, a predetermined preparatory effect image (video) is displayed while the game is being played, and after the game ends, a notification image is displayed to notify the player that the game has transitioned to the pseudo-bonus state.
For example, during the CZ state, an image of the main character sleeping is displayed as the CZ state image, and during a game in which the player wins the lottery to transition to the pseudo-bonus state, a preparatory effect video is displayed in which the main character is shown in close-up, showing whether or not he will wake up, and after the game ends, an announcement image of the main character waking up is displayed, thereby announcing that the player has won the pseudo-bonus state.

In addition, if there is a predetermined probability (e.g., 10%) that a game will be played during the CZ state in which the player will not win the pseudo-bonus state, the above-mentioned preparation effect image will also be displayed. In this case, after the game ends, an announcement image will be displayed in which the main character does not wake up, thereby announcing that the player will not win the pseudo-bonus state.

Furthermore, when the game is executed after the 10th game in the CZ state, a lottery to end the CZ state is held, and if this lottery is won, an effect is executed in which the screen gradually becomes darker during game execution, and after the game ends, an effect is executed in which the entire screen becomes dark to notify that the CZ state has ended.
In addition, when the game is played after the 10th game during the CZ state, even if the ending lottery is not won (continued), the same effect of gradually darkening the screen as described above will be executed with a predetermined probability.In this case, the screen will brighten again after the game ends, indicating that the CZ state will continue.

Note that the presentation used to notify whether or not a pseudo-bonus state has been entered during the CZ state may be other than the above. For example, a presentation in which an ally character and an enemy character battle each other may be executed over a predetermined period of games, and the result of this battle presentation may be used to notify whether or not a transition to the pseudo-bonus state has occurred.

・Transition process from CZ state to normal gaming state (arrow d1 in FIG. 3)
In the CZ state, if the player does not win the lottery to transition to the pseudo-bonus state but wins the lottery to end the CZ state, the player will transition to the normal game state after the game ends.
At this time, after the game ends, the screen of the main display 8 goes black, and the end of the CZ state is announced without transitioning to the pseudo bonus state.
Also, when the CZ state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state, the game zone continues as the advantageous zone, but the game zone may also transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone.

In addition, when transitioning from the CZ state to the normal game state, setting-related information (setting suggestion information) that can suggest the setting value set by the probability setting device 14 may be announced by the announcement means (main display 8, speaker 9) under the control of the main control device 10 and sub-control device 20. For example, a predetermined character from among multiple characters may be displayed on the main display 8 or sub-display 17. The character to be displayed is selected according to a selection probability that is preset in accordance with each setting value of the probability setting device 14, making it possible to predict the setting value to some extent from the displayed character.

(pseudo bonus state)
The pseudo-bonus state, which is a special gaming state, is a gaming state in which it is extremely easy to win medals, as push order navigation for the push order bell role is executed to notify the player of an operation mode that is advantageous to the player during the game in the pseudo-bonus state.

In addition, the pseudo bonus state continues for a predetermined period of time, and a lottery to transition to the AT state is held in a predetermined game executed during that period.
In the first embodiment, the pseudo bonus state is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 20 games).

During the pseudo-bonus state, push order navigation is executed, and the probability of winning the push order bell role is set so that medals increase if the player plays the game according to the push order navigation. Therefore, if the player wins the lottery to transition to the AT state during the pseudo-bonus state, where a large number of medals can be won, the AT state will occur after the pseudo-bonus state ends, allowing the player to play the game to trigger the next pseudo-bonus state while winning a certain number of medals, creating a synergistically advantageous state for the player.

Furthermore, in the first game that transitions to the pseudo bonus state, the period from when the start lever 3 is operated until when the stop button 5 is operated is extended by the control of the main control device 10 compared to a normal game, and during this period, a pseudo game (announcement pseudo game) is executed in which the reel 4 is rotated forward, and then a special pattern combination on the reel 4 is temporarily stopped and then rotated forward again, thereby announcing that the pseudo bonus state has occurred.
It should be noted that rather than executing a pseudo-game notification in the first game that transitions to the pseudo-bonus state and temporarily stopping the special symbol combination (such as "7-7-7"), the pseudo-bonus state can be initiated in the next game in which a predetermined role (for example, a replay role) is won, and when the predetermined role is won, the stopping of reel 4 can be controlled so that the special symbol combination stops when reel 4 is stopped in a predetermined sequence of presses (for example, "5c → 5b → 5a"), and when the predetermined role is won, the predetermined sequence of presses can be announced, making it possible to form the special symbol combination one game before the pseudo-bonus state begins.

The period during which the pseudo-game notification is performed is set to, for example, 15 seconds, and during this period, operation of the stop button 5 is invalid, so that even if the reel 4 is operating, the game cannot proceed.
Then, at the end of the pseudo-announcement game, the special symbol combination (such as "7, 7, 7") will stop (automatically stop) temporarily, so the pseudo-bonus state is a state in which navigation is executed in the same way as the AT state in terms of game content, but in appearance it is as if a so-called bonus state (real bonus state) has occurred, which differentiates it from the AT state.

Furthermore, when the notification pseudo game ends, the reel 4 automatically starts rotating in the forward direction, and the operation of the stop button 5 becomes effective, starting the actual game. From this point on, the stop operation of the first game that has transitioned to the pseudo bonus state becomes possible in the same way as in a normal game.
During the reel effect, the sub-controller 20 controls the main display 8 to display an effect image corresponding to the reel effect, which indicates the occurrence of a pseudo bonus state.

・Transition process from pseudo bonus state to AT state (arrow f1 in Figure 3)
In the pseudo bonus state, a lottery process for transitioning to the AT state is performed based on the execution of each game during the pseudo bonus state.
In this first embodiment, a lottery process for transitioning to the AT state is executed for each game during the pseudo bonus state to determine whether or not to transition to the AT state.
Then, as a result of the lottery process for transition to the AT state, if the conditions for transition to the AT state are met as a result of the establishment of a special condition, the game state will transition to the AT state after the pseudo bonus state ends.
Also, when the pseudo bonus state ends and the game transitions to the AT state, the game zone continues as the advantageous zone.

In this first embodiment, the AT state transition lottery process may be any process that transitions to the AT state during part of the pseudo bonus state. The AT state transition lottery may be performed with a fixed probability for each game, or when a rare role is won, the AT state transition lottery may be performed with a higher probability than when a non-rare role is won.

In addition, the lottery process for transitioning to the AT state may be performed throughout the entire pseudo-bonus state, or a period of a predetermined number of games (for example, three games) may be set at the end of the pseudo-bonus state for performing the lottery process for transitioning to the AT state, and a lottery may be held during this period to determine whether or not to transition to the AT state.
In addition to the lottery process for transition to the AT state in the game during the pseudo bonus state, a lottery process for transition to the AT state may be performed at the time of transition (start) of the pseudo bonus state.

In addition, during the pseudo-bonus state, in response to the execution of the game, a predetermined effect is executed on the main display 8 under the control of the sub-controller 20, which acts as an effect control means, based on the reception of control information from the main controller 10.

For example, when a rare role is won in a game during the pseudo bonus state, an effect is executed to notify the player that the rare role has been won.
Furthermore, during a predetermined period of games (for example, three games) at the end of the pseudo-bonus state, a continuous presentation (battle presentation) is executed according to the lottery result for transitioning to the AT state, and if the lottery result is for transitioning to the AT state, the presentation result is derived in which the ally character ultimately wins, and if the lottery result is not for transitioning to the AT state, the presentation result is derived in which the ally character ultimately loses, and the lottery result for transitioning to the AT state is announced as the result of the continuous presentation.

The presentation mode during the continuous presentation is determined in advance based on the result of the AT state transition lottery, and if the lottery result is to transition to the AT state, a presentation mode in which the ally character is dominant is determined, and if the lottery result is not to transition to the AT state, a presentation mode in which the ally character is at a disadvantage is determined. However, since the AT state transition lottery process is also performed in the game while the continuous presentation is being executed, the final result of the continuous presentation is determined taking into account the AT state transition lottery process during the continuous presentation.
In addition, if a transition to the AT state is determined as a result of the lottery process for transition to the AT state during the pseudo bonus state, a presentation may be executed to notify the player that the transition to the AT state has been confirmed from that point on.

In addition, during other pseudo bonus states, in order to increase the excitement of the game, a pseudo bonus state effect (pseudo bonus effect) in which a specific character appears is displayed on the main display 8 or sub-display 17. In the pseudo bonus effect, for example, an introductory image of each character that appears is displayed, and specific music is output from the speaker 9.

Furthermore, the lottery for transitioning to the AT state during the pseudo bonus state may be carried out in a manner other than that described above. For example, when reel 4 is stopped in a normal operation mode (for example, an operation mode in which the left reel 4a is stopped first), a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role will stop, but when reel 4 is stopped in an irregular operation mode different from the normal operation mode (for example, an operation mode in which the right reel 4c is stopped first), a specific replay role in which a special symbol combination (for example, "BAR, BAR, BAR") stops can be drawn, and when a specific replay role is won during a period other than the lottery game period during the pseudo bonus state, a transition to the AT state may occur unconditionally (with a 100% probability).
In this case, when a specific replay combination is won, it is preferable that the main display 8 displays an image encouraging the player to aim for an irregular operation mode and a special symbol combination.

In addition, a button effect may be executed during a continuous effect (battle effect) during the pseudo bonus state.
The button presentation as an operation presentation is a series of presentations in which first, on the main display 8 (or sub-display 17), an operation image consisting of an image imitating an operation button that prompts the operation of the presentation button 2d, or text information instructing the operation (for example, "PUSH"), etc. is displayed, and then, when the instructed presentation button 2d (or upper presentation button 2f) is operated, a predetermined image is displayed on the main display 8 (or sub-display 17).For example, at the end of the game in which the final game of the battle presentation is executed, an image imitating an operation button or an operation image is displayed, and then, when the instructed presentation button 2d is operated, an image announcing the result of the predetermined battle lottery is displayed on the main display 8.
In this case, it is preferable that if the result of the match lottery is a win, the probability of the button effect being executed is higher than if the result is a non-win.

-Transition process from pseudo bonus state to normal game state (arrow b1 in Figure 3)
In the pseudo bonus state, if a special condition is not met and the right to transition to the AT state is not granted, that is, if the result of the lottery process for transition to the AT state in the pseudo bonus state is not a win, the state transitions to the normal game state after the pseudo bonus state ends.
In addition, in some cases where the pseudo-bonus state ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state, the game zone may not transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone.

In addition, when transitioning from the pseudo-bonus state to the normal game state, the main control device 10 and sub-control device 20 may control the notification means (main display 8, sub-display 17, speaker 9) to notify setting-related information (setting suggestion information) that can suggest the setting value set by the probability setting device 14. For example, by displaying a predetermined character from among multiple characters on the main display 8 or sub-display 17 and selecting this displayed character according to a selection probability that is preset in accordance with each setting value of the probability setting device 14, it becomes possible to predict the setting value to some extent from the displayed character.

(AT state)
The AT state in this first embodiment is a game state in which it is easy to win medals, as push order navigation for the push order bell role is performed to notify the player of an operation mode that is advantageous to the player during the game in the AT state.

In this first embodiment, details will be described later, but two types of AT states are set: a first AT state and a second AT state, each with different termination conditions, and the main control unit 10 determines the type of AT state to be generated and switches between the types of AT states.
Therefore, the termination conditions of the AT state differ depending on the type of the AT state at that time, and various aspects of the AT state, such as the duration, can be changed.

When the game transitions to the AT state, a pseudo-game notification may be executed in the first game, similar to when the game transitions to the pseudo-bonus state, by pseudo-stopping a predetermined symbol combination on a predetermined line in the display window 6, and a reel effect may be executed to notify the transition to the AT state.

In addition, during the AT state, if a predetermined rare role is won, an additional lottery is held to award a predetermined benefit (remaining difference in number of coins, number of remaining games), and if the additional lottery is won, the duration of the AT state will be extended according to the benefit awarded.
Any combination of the triggering role for the additional lottery may be used, or a combination of multiple bonuses with different bonus sizes may be selected. The size of the bonus to be awarded may also be varied depending on the winning role.

In addition, in this first embodiment, if a predetermined condition is met in a game during the AT state, an additional specialized zone occurs for a predetermined period of time, and during this specialized zone, the number of games to be added is drawn at a higher rate than outside the additional specialized zone.
Furthermore, since the specialized zone is a state that is extremely advantageous to the player, it is preferable that the above-mentioned predetermined conditions be met with a predetermined probability when a rare combination with a low probability of winning is won.

・Transition process from AT state to pseudo bonus state (arrow i1 in Figure 3)
During the AT state, as during the normal game state, the main control unit 10 performs a lottery process to transition to the pseudo bonus state based on the winning of a specified rare role as a specific lottery result, and the transition process to the pseudo bonus state is performed with a specified probability (for example, 20%) when a chance role or a strong cherry role is won.
Also, if the AT state transitions to a pseudo bonus state, the game zone will continue as an advantageous zone.

If the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state during the AT state is won, the AT state being executed is temporarily interrupted and the game state is transitioned to the pseudo bonus state.
Therefore, the number of remaining games in the AT state is reserved when transitioning to the pseudo bonus state, and when returning to the AT state again, the AT state is resumed based on the reserved number of remaining games.
Also, if the AT state transitions to the pseudo bonus state, the pseudo bonus state will be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 20 games) as described above.

However, if the pseudo-bonus state is entered during the AT state, unlike when the pseudo-bonus state is entered during normal play, the lottery process for entering the AT state is not performed, and the pseudo-bonus state ends and the AT state is returned to once a predetermined number of games have been played.

In addition, when the AT state transitions to the pseudo bonus state, an additional lottery may be held when a predetermined role is won during the pseudo bonus state.
Also, if the player wins the lottery to transition to the pseudo-bonus state during the AT state, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state may not occur immediately, but may occur after a battle presentation (a battle presentation in which the friendly character wins) as described above has been performed for a predetermined period of time (for example, three games).
In addition, even if a player wins a specified rare role during the AT state but does not win the lottery to transition to the pseudo-bonus state, a battle effect (a battle effect in which an ally character is defeated) may be executed.

・Transition process from AT state to normal gaming state (arrow h1 in FIG. 3)
If the termination condition is met in the AT state, the game will transition to a normal game state after the AT state ends.
In addition, when the AT state ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state, the game zone transitions from the advantageous zone to the normal zone.
In addition, the advantageous zone may be continued in some cases when the AT state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state.

In addition, when the AT state ends, an AT end state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), and during the AT end state, the game progress is temporarily disabled, and after the AT end state ends, the game transitions to the normal game state.
During the AT end state, setting-related information that can suggest the setting value set by the probability setting device 14 is notified by the notification means under the control of the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20. For example, a predetermined image is displayed on the main display 8 and the sub-display 17, and a predetermined sound is output by the speaker 9.
As described above, the gaming state transition is performed in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment.

[Lottery table used to determine the ceiling number of games on the main control device]
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, a description will be given of the lottery for determining the ceiling number of games when a game is executed in the normal gaming state in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment.
When the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous zone are met (for example, when a bell role is won) in the normal zone in the normal gaming state, the main control device 10 selects the ceiling number of games to be played in the subsequent normal gaming state.

When the number of games in the normal game state reaches the selected ceiling number of games, a pseudo bonus state is generated as a bonus.
In this first embodiment, the pseudo-bonus state can also occur when a transition lottery is won when a specified role (for example, a rare role) is won during the normal game state, but the pseudo-bonus state is mainly generated when the number of games played reaches the ceiling number of games.

In addition, when determining the ceiling number of games, the main control unit 10 first determines a zone in which a predetermined range of game numbers is specified for roughly determining the ceiling number of games, and then determines the ceiling number of games by selecting one game number from within the range of game numbers in the determined zone.
There are four pre-set zones, zones 1 to 4, each spaced at a predetermined interval. Therefore, if the actual number of games reaches one of these four zones, the possibility of a pseudo-bonus state occurring increases, and the player's expectations increase at each predetermined timing.

The range of ceiling game numbers for each zone is 50 to 100 games in Zone 1, 250 to 299 games in Zone 2, 450 to 499 games in Zone 3, and 750 to 800 games in Zone 4.

Therefore, for example, if Zone 1 is selected, a relatively small ceiling game number will be determined, and the game will proceed in a manner that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if Zone 4 is selected, a relatively large ceiling game number will be determined, and the game will proceed in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player. However, even if Zone 4 is selected, because the maximum value is set to 800 games, a pseudo-bonus state will always occur before the maximum number of games has been played.

In addition, the main control device 10 performs processing to determine the game mode when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone.
The game modes are set to a normal mode in which any of the above zones 1 to 4 can be selected, and a heaven mode in which only zone 1 can be selected, and when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, one of the game modes is selected based on the setting value in the probability setting device 14.
Therefore, when the heaven mode is selected, the pseudo bonus state will always occur within 100 games.
The probability of selecting the heaven mode is set to be higher as the set value in the probability setting device 14 is higher.

FIG. 4 shows an internal lottery table used to determine the ceiling number of games when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone when the normal mode is selected.
When normal mode is selected, the ceiling number of games is determined by first determining the zone for determining the ceiling number of games using the internal lottery table shown in Figure 4, and then determining the ceiling number of games from within the determined zone.When determining the zone, the main control unit 10 draws random numbers for the zone lottery, and in Figure 4, the range (number) of random number values to be obtained is set to 256, and the number of random number values that will be obtained when each zone is won is shown.

As shown in Figure 4, for example, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 1, zone 1 is selected with a probability of 48/256, zone 2 is selected with a probability of 16/256, zone 3 is selected with a probability of 64/256, and zone 4 is selected with a probability of 128/256.

Although detailed explanations will be omitted, even when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is set to settings 2 to 6, one of the zones will be selected and determined at each probability shown in Figure 4.

Then, although not shown in the illustration, after each zone is determined, a lottery is held to determine the ceiling number of games set within the zone, and ultimately the ceiling number of games after the transition to the current advantageous zone is determined.
For example, if zone 1 is determined, any number of games between 50 and 100 games is determined as the ceiling number of games.

When the heaven mode is selected, a ceiling game number will be determined within the range of zone 1.
The determination of the ceiling number of games within each zone is carried out based on the random number for the ceiling number of games lottery that is extracted when the conditions for transition to the advantageous zone are met, in the same way as extracting the random number for the zone lottery, and the ceiling number of games within each zone is drawn evenly, but the lottery processing may also be performed so as to increase the selection rate of the specified ceiling number of games within each zone.

Since the ceiling number of games is determined as described above, when the heaven mode is selected, the ceiling number of games within 100 games will always be selected.
Also, when the normal mode is selected, the higher the set value in the probability setting device 14, the higher the probability that a smaller ceiling game number will be selected.

Also, when the setting value is an even number, the probability of zone 1 being selected is relatively lower than when the setting value is an odd number, but the probability of zones 2 and 3 being selected is higher.Therefore, when the setting value is an even number, a lower ceiling game number is less likely to be selected than an odd number, but a higher ceiling game number also tends to be less likely to be selected.
On the other hand, when the set value is an odd number, the probability that zone 1 will be selected is relatively higher than when the set value is an even number, but the probability that zone 4 will be selected is also higher, and when the set value is an odd number, a lower ceiling game number is more likely to be selected than when the set value is an even number, but a higher ceiling game number also tends to be selected.

In addition, in the normal zone, if a rare role is won, the conditions for transitioning to a favorable zone may be met.In this case, the probability of selecting a zone with a lower ceiling number of games may be increased compared to when a role other than a rare role is won, and further, the probability of selecting zone 3 or zone 4 with a relatively high number of games may be decreased.
In addition, in this first embodiment, the game is transitioned to the normal zone when the pseudo-bonus state that does not involve a transition to the AT state ends, but it is also possible to continue the advantageous zone for a part of the time when the pseudo-bonus state that does not involve a transition to the AT state ends, and in this case, it is preferable to reset the ceiling game number when the pseudo-bonus state ends.
The lottery for the ceiling number of games is carried out as described above.

[Transition of game state during AT state]
Next, with reference to Figure 5, the transition of the game state during the AT state will be explained.
As described above, in the first embodiment, two types of AT states are set: the first AT state and the second AT state.

The first AT state as the first special game state is a so-called difference-number-managed AT state, and its duration is managed so that the first termination condition is met when the net increase in the number of medals acquired by the player during the AT state exceeds a preset upper limit value.
On the other hand, the second AT state as the second special game state is a so-called game number-managed AT state, and the duration is managed so that the second termination condition is met when the number of games executed during the AT state exceeds a preset upper limit value.

During the AT state, the main control device 10 controls the state to either the first AT state or the second AT state, thereby managing the duration of the AT state.
In other words, the main control unit 10 is equipped with a special game state control means that can control the special game state to either a first special game state (first AT state) in which the special game state ends based on the satisfaction of a predetermined first termination condition, or a second special game state (second AT state) in which the special game state ends based on the satisfaction of a second termination condition different from the first termination condition.

FIG. 5 shows the transition of the game state during the AT state, which is realized by the control of the main control unit 10.
As shown in FIG. 5, in the main control device 10, when the transition condition (start condition) for the AT state is met, the state is first transitioned to the first AT state.
Therefore, at the start of the AT state, the system transitions to a first AT state of difference number management type, where an initial remaining difference number (for example, 100 sheets) is set, and the first AT state of this remaining difference number is generated.

Then, when the game is executed during the first AT state and the remaining difference in number of coins is 0 or less, that is, when the difference in number of coins during the first AT state exceeds the upper limit (+100 coins), the first termination condition is met, and the AT state ends when the first AT state ends.
In other words, the main control device 10, which serves as a special game state control means, enables the first termination condition to be met based on the number of game media acquired by the player during the first special game state (first AT state).

On the other hand, if the AT state switching condition is met during the first AT state before the first termination condition is met, switching from the first AT state to the second AT state is performed (arrow a2 in Figure 5).
In other words, the main control device 10, which serves as a special game state control means, is equipped with a special game state switching control means that can execute switching control from the first AT state to the second AT state based on the establishment of predetermined conditions during the first AT state.
Therefore, in the middle of the AT state, the AT state is switched from a difference number management type AT state to a number of games management type AT state, and the management of the duration is changed.

In this first embodiment, the switching condition for switching to the second AT state is met with a predetermined probability (e.g., 30%) when a predetermined rare role (e.g., a strong cherry role) is won in a game during the first AT state.
Therefore, if the above-mentioned specified rare role is won, the main control unit 10 executes a switching lottery to determine whether or not to switch to the second AT state, and if the switching lottery is won, the above-mentioned switching condition is met and a decision is made to switch to the second AT state, and as a result, the first AT state ends (ends midway) in that game, and the next game transitions to the second AT state.

Furthermore, if a predetermined rare role (for example, a strong cherry role) is won in a game during the first AT state, a switching effect is executed by, for example, displaying an image on the main display 8 informing the player that the predetermined rare role has been won, along with an effect image informing the player whether or not to switch to the second AT state.
For example, at the start of a game in the first AT state in which a predetermined rare role is won, a treasure chest image resembling a treasure chest is displayed on the main display 8, thereby starting the switching effect; while the game is running, a video of a predetermined character opening the treasure chest image is displayed, and after the game ends, the switching effect ends when an image is displayed in which the treasure chest image is opened to reveal its contents.

If the contents of the treasure chest image disclosed at the end of the switching performance are empty, it is announced that the switching lottery was not successful, i.e., a switch to the second AT state will not occur, and the first AT state will continue as is; if treasure comes out of the contents of the treasure chest image disclosed at the end of the switching performance, it is announced that the switching lottery was successful, i.e., a switch to the second AT state will occur, and a switch to the second AT state will occur.
The switching effect may be executed as a continuous effect (such as a battle effect) across multiple games.

After switching to the second AT state, the game state transitions to a game number management type second AT state, and the initial number of remaining games is set when the switch is decided, and the second AT state is generated for this number of remaining games.
Then, when the number of remaining games becomes 0 or less as a result of the execution of a game during the second AT state, i.e., when the number of games executed during the second AT state exceeds the upper limit number and the second termination condition is met, the AT state ends together with the end of the second AT state.
That is, the main control device 10 as the special game state control means enables the second termination condition to be established based on the number of games executed during the second special game state (second AT state).
After switching to the second AT state, the state is not switched back to the first AT state.

In addition, the initial number of remaining games set when switching to the second AT state is set by referring to the remaining difference in the number of medals in the first AT state at that time, and dividing this remaining difference by the expected value of the net increase in the number of medals per game that is preset in the slot machine 1.
In this first embodiment, the expected value of the net increase in the number of medals per game (the actual number of medals that increase) is set based on the probability of winning the push order bell role, etc., and is approximately 3 medals per game.

Therefore, for example, if the second AT state is switched to when the remaining difference in number of coins is 60, the initial number of remaining games in the second AT state will be 20 games.
As a result, when switching to the second AT state, the number of remaining games that will give an expected value for the net increase in the number of medals equal to the remaining difference in the number of medals in the first AT state at that time will be awarded.

In this way, when switching to the second AT state, the initial number of remaining games in the second AT state is determined, and the termination condition (second termination condition) of the second AT state is determined by this initial number of remaining games in the second AT state, so the termination condition of the second AT state is determined according to the remaining difference in number of coins that will be updated during the first AT state.
In other words, the main control unit 10, which serves as a special game state switching control means, is capable of setting a second termination condition for the switched-to second special game state (second AT state) based on predetermined information (remaining difference in number of coins) that is updated during the first special game state (first AT state) and is related to the establishment of the first termination condition.

As described above, in this first embodiment, during the AT state, either the first AT state or the second AT state, which have different termination conditions, will occur, making it possible to play an interesting game in which the continuation pattern of the AT state changes in various ways.
In other words, in a difference number management type AT state, the duration is managed according to the number of medals actually paid out regardless of the number of games paid out, so the AT state has the characteristic that it does not cause dissatisfaction to the player even when a game is played that does not pay out medals.

On the other hand, in a game number management type AT state, even if a large amount of medals are paid out, the AT state continues until the specified number of games are played, so the AT state has the characteristic that even if a large amount of medals are paid out, the sense of expectation continues until the specified number of games are played.
In other words, it is possible to provide game content that changes the player's sense of security and anticipation depending on the type of AT state.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in this first embodiment, control is performed so that the second AT state is more advantageous to the player than the first AT state, so that while in the first AT state, the player will become interested in switching to the second AT state, and when the player switches to the second AT state, their expectations of winning medals will increase.
In other words, by switching to the second AT state, it is possible to provide game content that increases the interest of the game and the player's sense of anticipation.

Furthermore, a second termination condition for the switched-to second AT state can be set based on the remaining difference in number of sheets, which is information updated during the first AT state and is related to the establishment of the first termination condition. Therefore, even when switching between the first AT state and the second AT state is performed, the first AT state and the second AT state can be associated with each other, thereby making it possible to increase the interest during the AT state.
Furthermore, since the duration of the second AT state is changed depending on the time when the first AT state ends, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the time when the first AT state ends, and if the first AT state ends early, the duration of the second AT state will be longer, which will increase the player's sense of anticipation.

In addition, the first termination condition can be established based on the number of gaming media acquired by the player during the first AT state, and the second termination condition can be established based on the number of games played during the second AT state. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the gaming aspects between the first AT state and the second AT state, thereby making gaming more enjoyable during the AT state.

In this first embodiment, the predetermined condition (switching condition) for switching to the second AT state is that a predetermined rare role (for example, a strong cherry role) is hit with a predetermined probability (for example, 30%) in a game during the first AT state. However, the predetermined condition may be other than the above, such as when a predetermined role is hit a predetermined number of times during the first AT state, or when the number of games played during the first AT state reaches a predetermined number.

Furthermore, the initial setting of the remaining number of games when switching to the second AT state may be other than that described above; for example, the remaining number of difference coins in the first AT state may be used as the remaining number of games in the second AT state.
Alternatively, a predetermined number of remaining games may be initially set regardless of the remaining number of medals in the first AT state. In this case, it is preferable to set the initial number of remaining games so that the expected value for the net increase in medals is higher than the remaining number of medals at the end of the first AT state.
In addition, the number of remaining games in the second AT state may be determined by lottery based on the remaining difference in the number of coins in the first AT state. In this case, it is preferable to perform the lottery so that the larger the remaining difference in the number of coins, the larger the number of remaining games.
As described above, the transition of the game state during the AT state is carried out.

[Additional lottery during AT mode]
Next, referring to Figure 6, the additional lottery during the AT state will be explained.
As mentioned above, during the AT state, an additional lottery is held to award a bonus based on the results of the role lottery, and if the additional lottery is won, the duration of the AT state will be extended according to the bonus awarded.

In this first embodiment, the AT states are a first AT state and a second AT state, which have different controls regarding duration, so that when the additional lottery is won, the manner in which the bonus is awarded differs depending on the type of AT state.
In other words, in the main control device 10, if the additional lottery is won in a game during the first AT state, a predetermined number of medals is added to the remaining difference in number of medals as a bonus, and if the additional lottery is won in a game during the second AT state, a predetermined number of games is added to the remaining number of games as a bonus.

Therefore, if you win the additional lottery, in the first AT state, the remaining difference in number of coins will increase, thereby extending the duration, and in the second AT state, the remaining number of games will increase, thereby extending the duration.

Figure 6 shows the probability of winning when the main control unit 10 draws an additional lottery, that is, the probability of being awarded a bonus when the trigger role for the additional lottery is won during the AT state.
In the first embodiment, the trigger role for the additional lottery is set to a rare role, but it may be any other role.

First, as shown in Figure 6(a), in a game in the first AT state, if a weak rare role is won, there is a 50% probability that 0 coins will be added (topped up) to the remaining difference in number of coins, i.e., no topping up will be performed, there is a 30% probability that 10 coins will be added (topped up) to the remaining difference in number of coins, there is a 17% probability that 30 coins will be added (topped up) to the remaining difference in number of coins, and there is a 3% probability that 50 coins will be added (topped up) to the remaining difference in number of coins.

Similarly, in a game in the first AT state, if a strong rare role is won, there is a 0% probability that 0 coins will be added (topped up) to the remaining difference in number of coins, meaning that an addition will always be made, there is a 60% probability that 10 coins will be added (topped up) to the remaining difference in number of coins, there is a 30% probability that 30 coins will be added (topped up) to the remaining difference in number of coins, and there is a 10% probability that 50 coins will be added (topped up) to the remaining difference in number of coins.

Next, as shown in Figure 6(b), in a game in the second AT state, if a weak rare role is won, there is a 50% probability that 0 games will be added (added) to the number of remaining games, i.e., no addition will be made, there is a 30% probability that 10 games will be added (added) to the number of remaining games, there is a 17% probability that 20 games will be added (added) to the number of remaining games, and there is a 3% probability that 50 games will be added (added) to the number of remaining games.

Similarly, in a game in the second AT state, if a strong rare role is won, there is a 0% probability that 0 games will be added (added) to the number of remaining games, meaning that an addition will always be made, there is a 60% probability that 10 games will be added (added) to the number of remaining games, there is a 30% probability that 20 games will be added (added) to the number of remaining games, and there is a 10% probability that 50 games will be added (added) to the number of remaining games.

Since the additional lottery is conducted as described above, there is a possibility that an additional lottery will be conducted if a rare role is won in both the first AT state and the second AT state, and the probability of winning the additional lottery and being awarded a larger bonus is higher if a strong rare role is won than if a weak rare role is won.
Therefore, if a rare role is won, the player's sense of expectation can be increased, and if a strong rare role is won, the player's sense of expectation can be further increased.

Furthermore, even if the player wins the additional lottery with the same rare role and the same probability, the player will be granted a more advantageous benefit in the second AT state than in the first AT state.
In other words, for example, if you win a strong rare role and win the additional lottery with a 30% probability, if you are in the first AT state, 30 medals will be added, but if you are in the second AT state, 20 games will be added, which means you can expect an increase of 60 medals.

As a result, the additional lottery is more advantageous to the player in the second AT state, making the second AT state a more advantageous special gaming state for the player than the first AT state. During the AT state, the player hopes that the state will switch to the second AT state, and when the state does switch to the second AT state, the player's sense of anticipation can be increased.

In addition, as long as the above-mentioned trend of the additional lottery can be formed, the probability of winning each additional lottery and the size of the benefit awarded may be other than those described above.
In addition, when a strong rare role is won during the first AT state, a lottery to switch to the second AT state may also be held, in which case both the switching lottery and the additional lottery may be held, or only the switching lottery may be executed preferentially, and an additional lottery may be held if the switching lottery is not won.
As described above, an additional lottery is conducted during the AT state.

[Modification 1 of the First Embodiment]
Next, a first modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
In variant 1 of this first embodiment, only the control related to the additional lottery in the game during the AT state differs from the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and everything else is the same as the slot machine 1 described above, so only the differences will be explained.

First, in the first modification of the first embodiment, the first AT state occurs at the initial stage of the AT state, as described above.
Then, in a game during the first AT state, if a trigger role (rare role) for an additional lottery is won, an additional lottery will be held to determine whether a specified number of medals will be added to the remaining difference in number of medals, as described above, and if this additional lottery is won, the remaining difference in number of medals will increase by the added amount and the duration will be extended by that amount.

Furthermore, in a game during the first AT state, if a trigger role (rare role) for an additional lottery is won, in addition to the additional lottery related to the increase in the remaining difference in number of coins described above, an additional lottery related to the increase in the number of remaining games will also be held at the same time.
This additional lottery for increasing the number of remaining games is an additional lottery for the number of remaining games in the second AT state, which may be switched to after that point, and if the additional lottery is won, the number of remaining games in the second AT state, which may be switched to afterwards, will increase.

In other words, if a player wins a role that triggers an additional lottery (rare role) in a game during the first AT state, in addition to an additional lottery (hereinafter referred to as a normal additional lottery) related to an increase in the remaining difference in the number of coins for the first AT state that is occurring at that time, an additional lottery (hereinafter referred to as a preparatory additional lottery) related to an increase in the remaining number of games for the second AT state that may occur later will also be held at the same time.
Therefore, if you win the additional lottery (preparatory additional lottery) that increases the number of remaining games for the second AT state, the number of games will be added (added) in advance before the state has switched to the second AT state.
Then, when the state switches to the second AT state after that, the number of games that has been determined to be added in advance will be added to the initial remaining games that are awarded when the state switches to the second AT state.

Even if the above-mentioned preparatory additional lottery is won, there is a possibility that the second AT state will not be switched on, in which case the benefit determined by winning the additional lottery will be invalidated.
However, if the player wins the preparation add-on lottery but does not switch to the second AT state, a specified bonus image will be displayed on the main display 8 based on the result of the invalid preparation add-on lottery, as will be described in detail below, to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

Figure 7 shows the winning probability for each additional lottery in the first AT state in the main control unit 10, that is, the probability of being awarded a bonus if the trigger role for the additional lottery is won during the AT state.
The trigger role for each additional draw is set to a rare role, but other roles may also be used.

First, Figure 7(a) shows the winning probability for each winning role during an additional lottery related to an increase in the remaining difference in the number of coins in a game in the first AT state, i.e., an additional lottery related to the first AT state (normal additional lottery) executed in the first AT state.

As shown in Figure 7(a), in a game in the first AT state, when a bonus lottery (normal bonus lottery) is held if each rare role is won, the bonus is won with the same probability as the bonus lottery during the first AT state in the first embodiment described above, and a predetermined number of medals is added (added).
The probability of winning the additional lottery (normal additional lottery) when each role is won, and the number of medals added at that time, are the same as those described above (see Figure 6 (a)), so explanation will be omitted here.
If the player wins the regular bonus lottery, the corresponding number of medals will be added to the remaining difference in number, and the first AT state will be extended by that amount.

Also, as shown in Figure 7(b), when a rare role is won in a game in the first AT state, in addition to the normal add-on lottery, an add-on lottery (preparatory add-on lottery) related to the second AT state, which may be switched to later, is also held at the same time, and the add-on is won with the same probability as described above, and a predetermined number of games is temporarily stored.
In addition, even after the preparation add-on lottery is won, the preparation add-on lottery continues to be executed, and if the preparation add-on lottery is won again, the corresponding number of games is added and stored to the number of games temporarily stored.

The probability of winning the additional lottery (preparatory additional lottery) when each role is won, and the number of games added at that time, are the same as those described above (see Figure 6 (b)), so explanation will be omitted here.
Then, when switching to the second AT state, as in the first embodiment described above, the initial number of remaining games will be awarded based on the remaining difference in the number of coins in the first AT state, but if the preliminary additional lottery is won, the number of games temporarily stored above will be added to the initial number of remaining games when switching to the second AT state, and the second AT state will be extended by that amount.

Also, since the regular bonus lottery and the preliminary bonus lottery are held separately, it is possible that, for example, when a rare role is won once, a player will win the regular bonus lottery and also win the preliminary bonus lottery.

In this way, the number of remaining games in the second AT state changes depending on the preparatory addition lottery, and therefore the second termination condition in the second AT state changes depending on the preparatory addition lottery.
Therefore, during the first AT state, a preparatory additional lottery is conducted in advance to change the second termination condition in the second AT state.

In other words, the main control unit 10, which serves as a special game state switching control means, is equipped with a change lottery control means that can execute a lottery (preparatory additional lottery) in advance during the first special game state (first AT state) that can change the second termination condition in the second special game state (second AT state).
In addition, the main control device 10, which serves as a change lottery control means, is capable of executing both a lottery that can change the first termination condition in the first special game state (first AT state) in a specified game during the first special game state, and a lottery that can change the second termination condition in the second special game state (second AT state) to which it can be switched.

As described above, in variant 1 of the first embodiment, in addition to the normal add-on lottery, a preparatory add-on lottery is held in games during the first AT state. Therefore, if an add-on lottery trigger role is won, in addition to the add-on lottery related to the increase in the remaining difference in number of coins at that time, an add-on lottery related to the increase in the number of remaining games for the second AT state, which may subsequently be switched to, will also be held in advance.

Therefore, in a game during the first AT state, it is possible to increase the interest in the game, and it is also possible to increase the sense of anticipation for both the first AT state and the second AT state.
Furthermore, if the player wins the preparation addition lottery, it is possible to significantly increase the player's sense of anticipation even before the switch to the second AT state is made.
Furthermore, in a specified game during the first AT state, both a normal additional lottery and a preliminary additional lottery are executed, which makes it possible to greatly increase the player's expectations in that game.

In addition, the probability of winning the bonus in the regular bonus lottery and the preparatory bonus lottery and the bonus benefits awarded may be other than those described above.For example, all or some of the trigger roles for the bonus lottery may be different between the regular bonus lottery and the preparatory bonus lottery.
In addition, the number of games remaining at the beginning of the second AT state is added by winning the preparatory add-on lottery, but the number of games remaining at the beginning of the second AT state may be determined only by the preparatory add-on lottery during the first AT state. In this case, if the preparatory add-on lottery is not won, the right to continue the second AT state will be lost, so the preparatory add-on lottery also serves as a lottery to determine whether or not the conditions for switching to the second AT state will be met.

In addition, even if the preparatory additional lottery is won, if the switch to the second AT state is not made, the granted benefit is invalidated. However, if the preparatory additional lottery is won but the switch to the second AT state is not made and the condition for terminating the first AT state is met, the first AT state may be extended according to the benefit granted by winning the preparatory additional lottery.

Next, referring to Figure 8, we will explain the presentation (top-up presentation) when the above-mentioned normal top-up lottery and preparatory top-up lottery are executed in variant example 1 of the first embodiment.
FIG. 8 shows the presentation image on the main display 8 when the normal bonus lottery and the preparatory bonus lottery are executed.

The main control unit 10 executes a normal add-on lottery and a preparatory add-on lottery when a specified rare role is won in a game during the first AT state, and transmits control information related to the normal add-on lottery and the preparatory add-on lottery to the sub-control unit 20, which executes the add-on performance by displaying performance images related to the normal add-on lottery and the preparatory add-on lottery on the main display 8 based on the received control information.
In addition, in response to the execution of the additional effect on the main display 8, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 9, and a predetermined decorative light is output from the lamp 11.

First, as shown in FIG. 8(a), during the first AT state, a first AT state image 24 is displayed in the main screen portion of the main display 8 to notify that the first AT state is being entered.
The first AT state image 24 can be any image that allows the player to recognize that the first AT state is in progress and increases the player's interest during the first AT state; for example, an introductory image (video) of the characters that appear can be displayed.

In addition, a remaining difference number image 21a ("50" in Figure 8(a)) is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen of the main display 8 to indicate the remaining difference number at that time in the first AT state, and the remaining difference number image 21a is updated (subtracted) according to the increase in the net increase in the number of medals in the game during the first AT state.
In addition, an executed game count image 21b ("20G" in Figure 8(a)) is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the main display 8, indicating the number of games that have been executed at that time in the AT state (first AT state + second AT state), and the executed game count image 21b is updated (incremented) according to the execution of games in the AT state.

The first AT state image 24, the remaining difference number image 21a, and the number of games played image 21b on the main display 8 will continue to be displayed in subsequent games.
Furthermore, when the game is switched to the second AT state in a subsequent game, the first AT state image 24 is replaced with an image informing the player of the second AT state, and the remaining difference number image 21a is replaced with an image informing the player of the remaining number of games.

Next, Figure 8(b) shows the effect image on the main display 8 from the start of the game while the game is being played when a strong rare role (for example, a strong watermelon role) is won during the first AT state.

In the first embodiment including this variant example 1, if a push order bell role is won in a game during the AT state, push order navigation images 22 (left push order navigation image 22a, center push order navigation image 22b, right push order navigation image 22c) in which numerical information indicating the operation sequence (press order) for the stop buttons 5 is displayed within a circular frame will be displayed at the bottom of the screen of the main display 8, but if a rare role is won in the game, symbol information ("!") indicating that a rare role has been won will be displayed within the frame of each push order navigation image 22 instead of numerical information, as shown in Figure 8 (b).
Then, based on the winning of the strong rare role, the main control unit 10 will conduct a regular additional lottery and a preparatory additional lottery.
The notification mode when a rare combination is won may be other than that described above, and for example, a winning effect accompanied by the appearance of a predetermined character may be executed.

Next, Figure 8 (c) shows the presentation image on the main display 8 after the game ends when a strong rare role (for example, a strong watermelon role) is won during the first AT state, and in particular shows the presentation image when both the normal additional lottery and the preparation additional lottery are won.
As shown in Figure 8 (c), if the regular additional lottery is won, a first additional winning image 21c will be displayed at the bottom left of the screen of the main display 8 to notify the player that the regular additional lottery has been won and to inform the player of the number of medals that will be added (added).
FIG. 8(c) illustrates a case where 10 medals are added to the remaining difference number, and therefore an image of "+10 medals" is displayed as the first additional winning image 21c.

On the other hand, if the player wins the preparatory additional lottery, a second additional winning image 21d will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the main display 8 to notify the player that the player has won the preparatory additional lottery and the number of games that will be added (added).
Figure 8 (c) illustrates an example in which 20 games are added to the remaining number of games, so an image of "+20G" is displayed as the second additional winning image 21d.

Then, as shown in Figure 8(d), after a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the first additional winning image 21c and the second additional winning image 21d were displayed, the first additional winning image 21c will be erased, and the remaining difference number image 21a for the number of medals won this time will be updated (from "50 medals" to "60 medals"), indicating that the duration of the first AT state has been extended.

Furthermore, after a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the first additional winning image 21c and the second additional winning image 21d were displayed, the second additional winning image 21d will disappear, and a preparatory additional game number image 21e will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the main display 8, indicating the total number of additional games won during the first AT state as a result of the preparatory additional lottery.

Note that Figure 8(d) shows a case where a player has not yet won the preparatory bonus lottery but has won this preparatory bonus lottery, so the second preparatory bonus winning image 21d will transition directly to the preparatory bonus game count image 21e. However, if a player has already won the preparatory bonus lottery and the preparatory bonus game count image 21e is being displayed, and then wins the preparatory bonus lottery again in a game after that, the number of added games at the time of the second win will be added to and displayed on the preparatory bonus game count image 21e that is already being displayed.

Furthermore, if the player immediately starts the next game after the game ends, the first additional winning image 21c and the second additional winning image 21d will be erased at that point, and the remaining difference number of coins image 21a and the number of preparatory additional games image 21e will be updated (including appearing).
Furthermore, the timing for switching between the images related to the normal bonus lottery and the preparatory bonus lottery is not limited to the times mentioned above, but may be any time during the game in which the rare role is won or after the game has ended.

Furthermore, if the player does not win the regular bonus lottery or the preliminary bonus lottery, the first bonus winning image 21c or the second bonus winning image 21d may not be displayed, or an image (such as "Sorry") may be displayed to notify the player that the player did not win the bonus lottery.

As described above, in variant 1 of the first embodiment, when a normal add-on lottery and a preparatory add-on lottery are performed in a game during the first AT state, an add-on effect related to the normal add-on lottery and the preparatory add-on lottery will be performed on the main display 8.

As a result, it is possible to further increase the entertainment value of games played during the first AT state, and it is possible to clearly notify players of the results of the regular bonus lottery and the preliminary bonus lottery, preventing players from misunderstanding the results of each bonus lottery.

In addition, by displaying the preparation additional game number image 21e, it is possible to increase the anticipation for switching to the second AT state, and the anticipation increases further with each increase in the preparation additional game number image 21e, so it is possible to efficiently increase the player's anticipation.
Also, if you win the preliminary bonus lottery multiple times, there is a possibility that you may not know the total number of bonus games, but this situation can be prevented.

Although the add-on effects related to the regular add-on lottery and the preparatory add-on lottery are executed on the main display 8, they may also be executed on the sub-display 17.
In addition, a button effect may be executed that involves operating the effect button 2d (or the upper effect button 2f) during the additional effect.

Next, referring to Figure 9, we will explain the effects that occur in Variation 1 of the first embodiment when, despite winning the preparatory bonus lottery during the first AT state described above, the switch to the second AT state is not made and the first termination condition in the first AT state is met.

As mentioned above, in games during the first AT state, in addition to the regular add-on lottery, a preparatory add-on lottery is also held. However, the bonus (number of add-on games) awarded as a result of this preparatory add-on lottery only becomes effective when the AT state switches to the second AT state. Therefore, even if it is decided that a bonus will be awarded as a result of the preparatory add-on lottery, if the first AT state ends without subsequently switching to the second AT state, the bonus that was scheduled to be awarded will be invalidated, which may leave players feeling dissatisfied.

Therefore, in variant 1 of the first embodiment, if the awarding of a bonus is determined as a result of the preliminary bonus lottery, but the game does not subsequently switch to the second AT state, it is possible to provide the player with useful bonus information as a relief measure.

Figure 9 shows the presentation images on the main display 8 during and after the final game when the first AT state ends without switching to the second AT state, even though the addition of the number of games was determined as a result of the preparatory addition lottery.
First, Figure 9(a) shows the presentation image on the main display 8 during the execution of the final game of the first AT state (after the medals have been paid out) in which the first termination condition is met.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), during the first AT state, as described above, the main display 8 displays the first AT state image 24, the remaining difference number image 21a, and the number of games played image 21b.
Furthermore, when the final game of the first AT state is executed and a predetermined number of medals are paid out, and the first termination condition is met, the remaining difference number image 21a is updated to show "0 medals."

Also, at this time, if the result of the preparatory addition lottery during the first AT state has determined that the number of games to be added to the second AT state will be increased, the preparatory addition game number image 21e will be displayed, and for example, an image of "+30G" will be displayed as shown.

In this state, when the final game in the first AT state ends, that is, even though the addition of the number of games has been determined as a result of the preparatory addition lottery, the first AT state ends without switching to the second AT state, and instead, as shown in Figure 9 (b), the first AT state image 24 is erased and a setting suggestion image 23 is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8.
The setting suggestion image 23 is information displayed under the control of the sub-controller 20, which displays the setting suggestion image 23 based on the setting value (setting stage) set by the probability setting device 14 as a setting means, based on control information from the main controller 10.

In other words, the sub-control device 20 is capable of displaying multiple images as setting suggestion images 23, and selects and displays one of the images depending on the setting value in the probability setting device 14.
For example, the sub-controller 20 selects and displays five types of images, images A to E, each of which will display a different character, according to a selection probability that is preset in accordance with each setting value of the probability setting device 14.Image A has a selection rate of 1% when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is the maximum value (setting 6), but a selection rate of 80% when the setting value is the minimum value (setting 1).Image E has a selection rate of 30% when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is the maximum value (setting 6), but a selection rate of 10% when the setting value is the minimum value (setting 1), and so on, so that each image is displayed with a different selection rate.

Therefore, each image is selected according to the setting value in the probability setting device 14, resulting in images that are more likely to be selected the higher the setting, and images that are more likely to be selected the lower the setting, and the selected image allows the player to predict to some extent the setting value in the probability setting device 14.
In addition, as long as the player is able to predict the setting value in the probability setting device 14 to some extent, the selection control of the image in the setting suggestion image 23 may be other than that described above.
Also, an image that definitively notifies a predetermined setting value may be provided as an option.
In addition, after the final game in the first AT state ends, the game progress may be disabled for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), thereby preventing a situation in which the next game starts without being able to check the setting suggestion image 23.

As described above, in variant example 1 of the first embodiment, if the addition of the number of games is determined as a result of the preparatory addition lottery during the first AT state, but the first AT state ends without switching to the second AT state, a setting suggestion image 23 is displayed on the main display 8, and bonus information is provided to the player.
In other words, the sub-controller 20 is equipped with a bonus granting means (sub-controller 20) that can grant a predetermined bonus (display a setting suggestion image 23 as bonus information) when the second termination condition is changed by the main controller 10 as a change lottery control means but switching to the second special game state (second AT state) is not performed.

Therefore, even if the number of games to be played in the second AT state is determined by a preparatory addition lottery, and the first AT state ends without switching to the second AT state, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction.
In addition, as a relief measure for the player, a setting suggestion image 23 is displayed, so that the player can obtain important information for selecting a gaming machine, thereby further reducing the player's dissatisfaction.

Note that the setting suggestion image 23 is displayed when the preparatory addition lottery has determined that the number of games to be added to the second AT state will be increased. However, the setting suggestion image 23 may be displayed when the number of games to be added is a predetermined number (e.g., 30 games) or more, and may not be displayed when the number is less than the predetermined number (e.g., 30 games).

In addition, as a relief measure for the player, bonus information is provided, but if the addition of the number of games to the second AT state has been determined by a preparatory addition lottery, or if the number of games to be added is a predetermined number (for example, 30 games) or more, the bonus may be granted by continuing the advantageous zone after the AT state ends without transitioning the game zone to the normal zone.
As described above, the first modification of the first embodiment is realized.

[Modification 2 of the First Embodiment]
Next, a second modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In variant example 2 of this first embodiment, only the control related to the execution of push order navigation when the push order bell role is won differs from that of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above; otherwise, it is the same as the slot machine 1 described above, so only the differences will be explained.

As mentioned above, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when a push order bell role is won during a game in the pseudo bonus state or AT state, the player is notified of the won push order bell role, i.e., specific operation information is notified (push order navigation is executed) to derive the specific result corresponding to the push order bell role ("bell bell bell"). However, in variant 2 of this first embodiment, the execution control of push order navigation during the AT state differs from that of the first embodiment described above.

Specifically, as mentioned above, when the AT state is entered, the reel is controlled to either the first AT state or the second AT state, and the main control unit 10 changes the probability of executing the push order navigation when the push order bell role is won depending on the type of AT state.
In other words, it is possible to generate an AT state in which the probability of executing push order navigation is relatively high, and an AT state in which the probability of executing push order navigation is relatively low.In an AT state in which the probability of executing push order navigation is relatively low, even if the push order bell role is won, there is a relatively high possibility that a game will be played in which push order navigation is not executed, and therefore the player is more likely to not obtain medals.

Figure 10 shows the probability of executing push order navigation (probability of announcing specific operation information) when the push order bell role is won for each type of AT state in the main control unit 10.
As shown in Figure 10, when the push order bell role is won in the first AT state, the execution control of the push order navigation is performed so that there is a 40% probability that the push order navigation will not be executed and a 60% probability that the push order navigation will be executed.
On the other hand, if the push order bell role is won in the second AT state, the push order navigation will never be executed and the execution control of the push order navigation will be performed so that the push order navigation is executed with a 100% probability.

The main control unit 10 controls the execution of the push order navigation when the push order bell role is won with the above probability, and if it decides to execute the push order navigation, it sends control information related to the push order navigation to the sub-control unit 20, which acts as an alarm control means.The sub-control unit 20 controls the main display 8, navigation lamp 12, and speaker 9 to execute various alarms corresponding to the push order navigation, such as displaying a push order navigation image on the main display 8.
Therefore, the probability that the push order navigation will be executed when the push order bell role is won is higher in the second AT state than in the first AT state, and the second AT state is an AT state that is more advantageous for the player than the first AT state.

As described above, in variant example 2 of the first embodiment, when the push order bell role is won, push order navigation is executed with a predetermined probability (60%) in the first AT state, whereas in the second AT state, push order navigation is executed with a higher probability (100%) than in the first AT state.
In other words, when a game that can derive a specific result ("Bell Bell Bell") is executed, the sub-controller 20 as notification control means can notify specific operation information (execute push order navigation) with a first probability (60%) during the first special game state (first AT state), and can notify specific operation information with a second probability (100%) that is higher than the first probability during the second special game state (second AT state).

Therefore, it becomes possible to generate a variety of AT states in which the execution mode of the push order navigation changes, thereby making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game.
Furthermore, when the second AT state is switched to, the probability of executing the push order navigation when the push order bell role is won is higher than in the first AT state, so it is possible to further increase the player's sense of anticipation when the second AT state is switched to.
Furthermore, in the first AT state, the player will play the game while looking forward to switching to the second AT state, which will further increase the player's motivation to play.

In addition, the probability of executing the push order navigation during each AT state may be other than those described above, as long as the probability of executing the push order navigation when the push order bell role is won is higher in the second AT state than in the first AT state.
In addition, two more types of second AT states may be provided, and the probability of executing the push order navigation during one second AT state may be set to 80%, and the other may be set to 100%.
Furthermore, when executing the push order navigation, the sub-controller 20 executes the push order navigation based on control information from the main controller 10, but the main controller 10 may also execute the push order navigation by directly controlling the notification means, for example, the main controller 10 may execute the push order navigation by directly controlling the navigation lamp 12.
As described above, the second modification of the first embodiment is realized.

[Modification 3 of the First Embodiment]
Next, a third modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In variant example 3 of this first embodiment, only the additional lottery during the second AT state and the control related to the transition of the game state during the AT state differ from the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above; otherwise, it is the same as the slot machine 1 described above, so only the differences will be explained.

First, we will explain the additional lottery during the second AT state in variant example 3 of this first embodiment.
In variant 1 of the first embodiment described above, during the first AT state, when a rare role is won, a normal add-on lottery is executed to increase the remaining difference in the number of coins, and a preparatory add-on lottery is executed to increase the remaining number of games.In this variant 3, as in variant 1, a normal add-on lottery and a preparatory add-on lottery are also executed.

Furthermore, in variant example 3 of the first embodiment, even after switching to the second AT state, both the normal additional lottery and the preparatory additional lottery are executed when a rare role is won.
However, since this is an additional lottery held after switching to the second AT state, the additional lottery related to the increase in the number of remaining games is a normal additional lottery, and the additional lottery related to the increase in the remaining difference in number of coins is a preparation additional lottery.

Therefore, if the player wins the preparatory addition lottery after switching to the second AT state, the number of medals will be added based on the duration of the first AT state, regardless of the duration of the second AT state at that time.
In addition, the winning probability of each additional lottery during the second AT state is controlled so that it becomes the winning probability shown in Figure 6(b) in the normal additional lottery, and so that it becomes the winning probability shown in Figure 6(a) in the preparatory additional lottery.

Then, when the second termination condition is met in the second AT state, if the player has won the preparatory addition lottery during the second AT state (the addition lottery related to the increase in the remaining difference in the number of medals), that is, if there are additional medals added as a result of the preparatory addition lottery at the end of the second AT state, the switching condition for the first AT state will be met, as shown in Figure 11, and a switch to the first AT state will be made (arrow b2 in Figure 11).
The switched first AT state will continue to be managed with the added number of medals as the initial remaining difference number.

Furthermore, after switching back to the first AT state, the control for switching back to the second AT state is performed again in the same manner as described above. Therefore, during the AT state, it is possible to alternate between the first AT state and the second AT state.
The other transitions of the game state shown in FIG. 11 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and therefore will not be described here.

As described above, in the third modification of the first embodiment, after switching from the first AT state to the second AT state, switching back to the first AT state is performed again.
In other words, the main control unit 10, as a special game state switching control means, is able to execute switching control back to the first special game state again after switching from the first special game state (first AT state) to the second special game state (second AT state).

Therefore, the game modes during the AT state can be further diversified, and the interest in the game can be further increased.
Furthermore, since the switch back to the first AT state occurs upon the end of the second AT state, it is possible to once again increase the motivation of a player who has become discouraged by the end of the second AT state.
Furthermore, the repeated control of the first AT state and the second AT state will continue as long as additional bonuses are added, which can greatly increase the player's sense of anticipation.

In addition, when switching back to the first AT state, the number of medals added in the preparatory addition lottery may be added to the initial remaining difference number of medals (for example, 50 medals) that has been set in advance.
As described above, the third modification of the first embodiment is realized.

[Fourth Modification of the First Embodiment]
Next, a fourth modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In variant example 4 of this first embodiment, only the control up to the time of switching from the first AT state to the second AT state during the AT state differs from that of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above; otherwise, it is the same as the slot machine 1 described above, so only the differences will be explained.

In the first embodiment described above, when a specified rare role (for example, a strong cherry role) is hit during a game in the first AT state, control is exercised to switch to the second AT state with a specified probability (for example, 30%). However, in this fourth variation, the first AT state is not switched directly to the second AT state, but is transitioned to the second AT state via the ATCZ state.

FIG. 12 shows the transition of the game state realized by the control of the main control device 10 in the fourth modification of the first embodiment.
As shown in Figure 12, in variant example 4 of the first embodiment, in a game during the first AT state, if a predetermined rare role (e.g., a strong cherry role) is won, the game state is transitioned to the ATCZ state with a predetermined probability (e.g., 40%) (arrow a3 in Figure 12).
The ATCZ state is a so-called chance zone in which switching to the second AT state is performed with a high probability for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 games), and during this period, a lottery to switch to the second AT state is held with a high probability.

For example, if a weak rare role is won, there is an 80% probability of switching to the second AT state, and if a strong rare role is won, there is a 100% probability of switching to the second AT state, and furthermore, if a bell role or a replay role is won, there is a 10% probability of switching to the second AT state.
Therefore, instead of switching directly from the first AT state to the second AT state, the game state is first shifted to one in which switching to the second AT state is highly likely to occur.

Then, in a game during the ATCZ state, if the specified period ends without the player winning the lottery to switch to the second AT state, the game state will be transitioned to the first AT state (arrow b3 in Figure 12), but if the player wins the lottery to switch to the second AT state during that period, the game state will be transitioned to the second AT state from the next game (arrow c3 in Figure 12).
The other transitions of the game state shown in FIG. 11 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and therefore will not be described here.

In addition, during the ATCZ state, the AT state will continue to be managed by subtracting the remaining difference in number of coins. Therefore, even if the gaming state is in the ATCZ state, the AT state will continue to be managed as in the previous first AT state, and the management will continue even if the game state transitions back to the first AT state.

In addition, during the ATCZ state, the sub-controller 20 controls various effects, such as effects to notify the player of the game state and effects corresponding to the results of the bonus lottery, in the same way as the CZ state during the normal game state described above. For example, effects are performed to notify the player that a switching lottery has been held and effects to notify the player of the result of the switching lottery.

As described above, in variant example 4 of the first embodiment, when a specified rare role is won in a game during the first AT state, the game transitions to the ATCZ state, in which switching to the second AT state occurs with a higher probability than in the previous state.
In other words, the main control unit 10, which serves as a special game state control means, is capable of controlling the special game state to a high probability special game state (ATCZ state) in which switching to the second special game state (second AT state) by the special game state switching control means (main control unit 10) is performed with a high probability based on the establishment of predetermined conditions.

Therefore, it is possible to switch to the second AT state in a more diverse manner, thereby making the game more entertaining.
Furthermore, when the state transitions to the ATCZ state, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for a longer period of time than when a switching lottery is conducted in one game.

In addition, in variant example 4 of the first embodiment, as described above, a lottery to switch directly to the second AT state may be held during a game in the first AT state, in which case there will be cases where the game will switch directly to the second AT state, and cases where the game will switch to the second AT state via the ATCZ state.
In addition, the duration of the ATCZ state and the winning probabilities at the time of the switching lottery during the ATCZ state may be other than those described above.

In addition, in order to prevent the first termination condition from being met during the ATCZ state, if the remaining difference in number of coins becomes a predetermined number or less, the lottery for transitioning to the ATCZ state may be prohibited.
In addition, during the ATCZ state, it is possible to suspend the updating of various data related to the continuation of the AT state (such as the remaining difference in number of sheets), and in this case, when the ATCZ state transitions to the first AT state, the remaining difference in number of sheets at the start of the ATCZ state will be restored and the first AT state will resume.
As described above, the third modification of the first embodiment is realized.

The above describes the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, switching to the second AT state is possible in all games during the first AT state, but switching to the second AT state may be prohibited if the number of games in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number or more.

In addition, when the AT state starts, the state is transitioned to the first AT state, but initially the state may be transitioned to the second AT state that is a game number management type, and when the condition for switching to the first AT state during the second AT state is met, the state may be switched to the first AT state that is a difference number management type.
In this case, it is preferable that the first AT state is more advantageous to the player than the second AT state.
Furthermore, at the start of the AT state, it may be possible to select whether to enter the first AT state or the second AT state based on the player's operation (for example, betting operation).
The slot machine 1 of the first embodiment is configured as described above.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

In the gaming machine of the second embodiment, only some of the control related to the transition of the gaming state and some of the presentation content are different from the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and the rest is the same as in the first embodiment.
Therefore, in this second embodiment, only the points that are different from the first embodiment will be described, and the other points are the same as the first embodiment described above, so the description will be omitted.

[Transition of gaming state during CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment]
First, the transition of the gaming state during the CZ state in the slot machine 1 in the second embodiment will be explained with reference to Figures 13 and 14.
In the slot machine 1 of this second embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the main control unit 10 controls the transition of each game state, but in this second embodiment, the control related to the CZ state differs from that in the first embodiment.

First, in the first embodiment described above, when a transition to the CZ state occurs, the main control unit 10 does not change the lottery control for transition to the pseudo-bonus state during the CZ state, but in this second embodiment, it is possible to change the lottery control for transition to the pseudo-bonus state during the CZ state.
In other words, in this second embodiment, two types of CZ states can occur: a relatively low CZ state (first CZ state) with a relatively high probability of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus state during the CZ state (second CZ state), and when the main control unit 10 transitions to a CZ state, it can control the CZ state to either of the above CZ states.

Figure 13 shows the transition of the game state during the CZ state, which is realized by the control of the main control unit 10 in this second embodiment.
As shown in Figure 13, the main control unit 10 conducts a lottery to transition to the CZ state during the normal game state, which is the first game state, and if the transition condition for the CZ state is met by winning this transition lottery, the game state is transitioned from the normal game state to the CZ state, which is the second game state that is advantageous to the player, for a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, when the transition condition for the CZ state is met, a lottery for transition to the second CZ state is held, and when the transition condition for the second CZ state is met as a result of winning this transition lottery, the CZ state is controlled in the second CZ state as a specific second game state, and when the transition condition for the second CZ state is not met as a result of not winning the transition lottery for the second CZ state, the CZ state is controlled in the first CZ state as the normal second game state.
In other words, if the transition lottery for the CZ state itself is won, a lottery is held to determine the type of CZ state, and this lottery determines whether the control during the CZ state will be the first CZ state (normal second game state) or the second CZ state (specific second game state).

Then, in a game during the first CZ state and the second CZ state, if the transition condition for the pseudo bonus state is met, the game state is transitioned from the CZ state to the pseudo bonus state.
In addition, in a game during the first CZ state and the second CZ state, if the transition conditions for the pseudo bonus state are not met and the termination conditions for the CZ state set for each CZ state are met, the game state is transitioned from the CZ state to the normal game state.

The main control unit 10, as will be described in detail later, conducts a lottery to transition to a pseudo-bonus state during the first CZ state in such a way that the probability of transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state is relatively low, and conducts a lottery to transition to a pseudo-bonus state during the second CZ state in such a way that the probability of transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state is relatively high.
Therefore, the second CZ state is a more advantageous CZ state for the player than the first CZ state.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of Figure 14, the CZ state transition lottery processing executed by the main control unit 10 will be described.
Figure 14 shows a CZ state transition lottery process executed by the main control unit 10, in which a transition lottery is conducted to determine whether to transition to the above-mentioned CZ state itself, and whether to transition to the second CZ state.

First, in step S1, it is determined whether or not a game has been executed.
This is a determination of whether or not a game has been executed during normal game play. If a game has been executed, the process proceeds to step S2; if a game has not been executed, the CZ state transition lottery process is terminated.

Next, in step S2, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery trigger role to the CZ state has been won.
In step S2, if it is determined that a CZ state transition lottery trigger role (for example, a weak watermelon role) has been won, the process proceeds to step S3, and if it is determined that the transition lottery trigger role has not been won, the CZ state transition lottery process is terminated.

Next, in step S3, a lottery process for transitioning to the CZ state is carried out.
The transition lottery process in step S3 is a transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the CZ state itself regardless of the type of CZ state, and a lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to the CZ state with a predetermined probability.
As will be described in more detail later, the probability of winning the CZ state transition lottery differs depending on whether the state is a low CZ probability state or a high CZ probability state, and the probability of transitioning to the CZ state changes depending on the probability state at that time.

Next, in step S4, it is determined whether or not the CZ state transition lottery has been won.
In step S4, if it is determined that the CZ state transition lottery has been won as a result of the CZ state transition lottery process, the process proceeds to step S5, and if it is determined that the transition lottery has not been won, the CZ state transition lottery process is terminated.

Next, in step S5, a lottery process for transitioning to the second CZ state is carried out.
The transition lottery process in step S5 is a transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition the winning CZ state to the second CZ state, and a lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to the second CZ state with a predetermined probability.
That is, after a decision is made to transition to the CZ state, a lottery is held to determine whether the CZ state will be the first CZ state or the second CZ state.
As will be described in more detail later, the probability of winning the lottery to transition to the second CZ state differs depending on whether the second CZ state is low probability or high probability, and the probability of transitioning to the second CZ state changes depending on the probability state at that time.

Next, in step S6, it is determined whether or not the lottery for transitioning to the second CZ state has been won.
If it is determined in step S6 that the lottery for transitioning to the second CZ state has been won, the process proceeds to step S7.

Then, in step S7, the second CZ state transition flag is set, and in step S8, the first CZ state transition flag is set, after which this CZ state transition lottery process is terminated.
The first CZ state transition flag and the second CZ state transition flag indicate that the right to transition to each CZ state has been granted. These flags are referenced at the start of the CZ state, and the CZ state is controlled to either the first CZ state or the second CZ state depending on the flag.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the CZ state is controlled to either the first CZ state or the second CZ state, which have different probabilities of transitioning to the pseudo bonus state.
Therefore, it is possible to make the game more diverse during the CZ state and improve the interest of the game.
In addition, the player's sense of expectation can be changed depending on the type of CZ state, and when the game transitions to the second CZ state, the player's sense of expectation can be increased.

It should be noted that after the CZ state transition lottery process is performed, a second CZ state transition lottery process is performed, but any other lottery format may be used as long as the transition to the CZ state itself is determined with a predetermined probability and the type of CZ state to transition to is determined with a predetermined probability.
Furthermore, three or more types of CZ states may be provided.
Furthermore, if the CZ state transition lottery is won, the transition to the CZ state may be made from the next game, or the transition to the CZ state may be made after a predetermined number of games (for example, three games) of CZ state continuous effects (main continuous effects) are executed on the main display device 8. Furthermore, if the CZ state transition lottery trigger role is won but the CZ state transition lottery is not won (or in part thereof), a fake CZ state continuous effect may be executed.
As described above, the transition of the game state during the CZ state is carried out in the gaming machine of the second embodiment.

[Probability state for transition of CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment]
Next, referring to Figure 15, we will explain the probability state for the transition of the CZ state, which is realized by the control of the main control device 10 in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

In the slot machine 1 of this second embodiment, as described above, the main control unit 10 conducts a transition lottery to determine whether to transition to the CZ state itself (first CZ state or second CZ state) based on the winning of a specified rare role (for example, a weak watermelon role), and if the transition lottery is won, the game state transitions to the CZ state.

In addition, the main control device 10 can control the transition lottery for the CZ state itself (first CZ state or second CZ state) in the normal gaming state using two types of probability states (probability state A): a low CZ probability state in which the CZ state is entered with a relatively low probability, and a high CZ probability state in which the CZ state is entered with a relatively high probability, and this probability state A can change the expectation for the transition to the CZ state itself.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the main control unit 10 decides to transition to the CZ state itself, it conducts a transition lottery (selection lottery) to determine whether to transition the CZ state to the first CZ state or the second CZ state. However, with regard to this transition lottery for the second CZ state, it is possible to control two types of probability states (probability state B): a second CZ low-probability state in which the second CZ state is entered with a relatively low probability, and a second CZ high-probability state as a specific first game state in which the second CZ state is entered with a relatively high probability, and this probability state B makes it possible to change the expectation for transitioning to the second CZ state.

Figure 15 shows transitions according to the progress of the game in probability state A, which determines the transition probability of the CZ state itself, and probability state B, which determines the transition probability of the second CZ state.
First, probability state A is set to transition to a CZ low probability state when the main control unit 10 is reset (including when the settings are changed), and a transition related to probability state A will be made depending on the results of the promotion lottery in the game during this CZ low probability state.

As shown in Figure 15, in a game (at the start of the game) when probability state A is in a CZ low probability state, a promotion lottery is held for probability state A, and if this promotion lottery is won (timing t1), from the next game, probability state A will transition from a CZ low probability state to a CZ high probability state (timing t2).
Therefore, by transitioning from a low-probability CZ state to a high-probability CZ state, the transition probability of the CZ state itself will change from a low state to a high state.

In addition, in a game (at the start of the game) in which probability state A is in a CZ high probability state, a demotion lottery is held for probability state A, and if this demotion lottery is won (timing t4), from the next game, probability state A will transition from a CZ high probability state to a CZ low probability state (timing t5).
Therefore, transitioning from a high-probability CZ state to a low-probability CZ state changes the transition probability of the CZ state itself from a high state to a low state.
Details of the promotion lottery and demotion lottery regarding the above probability state A will be described later.

In addition, the main control unit 10 controls the transition to probability state B separately from probability state A, and controls switching between the second CZ low probability state and the second CZ high probability state at a specified time.

In this second embodiment, when the main control unit 10 is reset (including when the settings are changed), the probability state B during normal game play is transitioned to the second CZ low probability state, and when a predetermined number of games (e.g., 100 times) have been played in the second CZ low probability state, the probability state B transitions from the second CZ low probability state to the second CZ high probability state, and then when a predetermined number of games (e.g., 30 times) have been played in the second CZ high probability state, the probability state B transitions from the second CZ high probability state to the second CZ low probability state, and thereafter, the probability state B is switched at basically the same times.
As will be described in detail later, the duration of the second CZ high probability state may be extended based on the fulfillment of certain conditions.

Therefore, as shown in the figure, when a predetermined number of games (e.g., 100) are played in the second CZ low probability state and the number of games required to advance to the second CZ high probability state is reached, probability state B will transition from the second CZ low probability state to the second CZ high probability state from that game (timing t3).

Furthermore, when a predetermined number of games (for example, 30) are played in the second CZ high probability state and the number of games required for demotion to the second CZ low probability state is reached, the probability state B from that game will transition from the second CZ high probability state to the second CZ low probability state (timing t6).
The timing for switching between each probability state may be at the start or end of the game, which triggers the switch.

Probability state B does not affect the transition lottery for the CZ state itself, but rather changes the probability of transitioning to the second CZ state if the transition lottery for the CZ state itself is won at that time.Therefore, if the transition lottery for the CZ state itself is won in the second CZ low probability state, the transition probability to the second CZ state becomes relatively low, and if the transition lottery for the CZ state itself is won in the second CZ high probability state, the transition probability to the second CZ state becomes relatively high.

In addition, since the main control unit 10 concurrently manages probability state A and probability state B as probability states related to the CZ state during normal game play, various combinations of probability states are formed by probability state A and probability state B.
For example, in the game between timing t2 and timing t3 shown in the figure, probability state A becomes a CZ high probability state, and probability state B becomes a second CZ low probability state, so only the transition probability of the CZ state itself is controlled in the high probability state.
Therefore, during this period, it is easy to transition to the CZ state itself, but even if it does transition to the CZ state itself, it becomes difficult to transition to the second CZ state.

Furthermore, in the game between timing t3 and timing t5 shown in the figure, probability state A becomes a CZ high probability state, and further probability state B becomes a CZ overlap high probability state in which it becomes a second CZ high probability state, so the transition probability of the CZ state itself is controlled in a high probability state, and furthermore the transition probability of the second CZ state is also controlled in a high probability state.
Therefore, during this period, it is easy to transition to the CZ state itself, and when it has transitioned to the CZ state itself, it is also easy to transition to the second CZ state.

Furthermore, in the game between timing t5 and timing t6 shown in the figure, probability state A becomes a CZ low probability state, and probability state B becomes a second CZ high probability state, so only the transition probability of the second CZ state is controlled in a high probability state.
Therefore, during this period, it is difficult to transition to the CZ state itself, but once the transition to the CZ state itself has occurred, it becomes easy to transition to the second CZ state.

As described above, under the control of the main control unit 10, when a specified role is won in the CZ low probability state during the normal game state, the probability state A during the normal game state is changed to the CZ high probability state.
In other words, the main control device 10, which serves as a game control means, is equipped with a probability control means that can control the first game state (normal game state) to a high probability state (high CZ probability state) that increases the probability of occurrence of the second game state (CZ state) based on the results of the game in the first game state (normal game state).
Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation regarding the occurrence of the CZ state itself.

Furthermore, when the number of games played reaches the number of games required to advance to the second CZ high probability state (e.g., 100 games) during the second CZ low probability state in the normal game state, the main control unit 10 will change the probability state B during the normal game state to the second CZ high probability state for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 games).
In other words, the main control device 10 is equipped with a game control means that can control the occurrence of a second game state (CZ state) during a predetermined period during the first game state (normal game state) to a specific first game state (second CZ high probability state) in which control related to the occurrence of the second game state (CZ state) is advantageous to the player.
Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation regarding the occurrence of the second CZ state.

In addition, the main control device 10, which serves as a game control means, is capable of controlling the game to a specific first game state (second CZ high probability state) based on the number of times the game has been executed during the first game state (normal game state) reaching a predetermined number.
Therefore, a high probability state of the second CZ occurs as the game progresses, making it possible to realize a highly exciting game in which the player's expectations gradually increase as the game progresses.
Furthermore, even if no bonus is obtained after playing the game multiple times, the second CZ high probability state will occur if the game is played a predetermined number of times, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, since the main control unit 10 separately manages and controls probability state A and probability state B, the transition probability of the CZ state itself and the transition probability (selection probability) of the first CZ state and the second CZ state change in various ways, which makes it possible to diversify the game content related to the transition of the CZ state and increase the interest of the game.
In addition, various combinations of each probability state will be generated, making it possible to diversify the game content related to the transition of the CZ state.
It is also possible to create a CZ overlap high probability state in which both probability states are high probability states, which can greatly increase the player's sense of anticipation.

In this second embodiment, when 100 games are played in the second CZ low probability state, the state transitions to the second CZ high probability state, and when 30 games are played in the second CZ high probability state, the state transitions to the second CZ low probability state, but the number of games played to transition to each probability state may be other than those described above.
In addition, the trigger for changing probability state B may be other than the above, and the number of times a specified role is won may be counted, and when the counting result reaches a specified number, a transition to each probability state related to probability state B may be made.
As described above, the probability state transition occurs in response to the transition of the CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment.

[Various lotteries related to the CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment]
Next, with reference to Figures 16 to 18, various lotteries related to the CZ state in the gaming machine of this second embodiment will be explained.

First, referring to Figure 16, we will explain the probability of promotion to the CZ high probability state and the probability of demotion to the CZ low probability state related to probability state A.
As described above, the main control unit 10 manages the probability state A and controls the transition (or maintenance) between the CZ low probability state and the CZ high probability state.
In this second embodiment, the probability state A is managed by holding a lottery (promotion lottery) for transitioning from a low-probability CZ state to a high-probability CZ state, and a lottery (demotion lottery) for transitioning from a high-probability CZ state to a low-probability CZ state, based on the results of the lottery for roles during normal game play in the main control unit 10.

FIG. 16 shows the probability of transition to each probability state based on the result of the lottery for the winning combination, which is realized by the control of the main control unit 10.
First, Figure 16(a) shows the probability of promotion (winning probability) to the CZ high probability state in the transition lottery when each role is won in the CZ low probability state during normal game play.
As shown in Figure 16(a), when a weak cherry role is won, a transition lottery is conducted to determine that there is a 70% probability that there will be no promotion to the CZ high probability state (the CZ low probability state will be maintained), and a 30% probability that there will be promotion to the CZ high probability state.

Similarly, if you win a role other than the weak cherry role (including a miss), there is a 100% chance that you will not be promoted to the CZ high probability state (you will remain in the CZ low probability state). In other words, if the lottery result is anything other than the weak cherry role, a transition lottery will be held to prevent promotion to the CZ high probability state.

Next, Figure 16(b) shows the probability of downgrading to a CZ low probability state (winning probability) in a transition lottery when each role is won in a CZ high probability state during normal game play.
As shown in Figure 16 (b), if the push order bell role is won, a transition lottery is conducted to determine with a 95% probability that there will be no demotion to the CZ low probability state (maintaining the CZ high probability state), and with a 5% probability that there will be demotion to the CZ low probability state.

Similarly, if you win a role other than the Push Order Bell role (including a miss), there is a 100% chance that you will not be demoted to the CZ low probability state (the CZ high probability state will be maintained). In other words, for lottery results other than the Push Order Bell role, a transition lottery will be held to prevent you from being demoted to the CZ low probability state.

As described above, promotion and demotion lotteries related to probability state A are conducted with a predetermined probability according to the results of the lottery for the role during the normal game state, making it possible to reliably manage probability state A.
Furthermore, when a game is played, the player will pay attention to things other than the granting of benefits such as pseudo-bonus states, which can increase the interest of the game.
Furthermore, if the player wins the promotion lottery trigger role, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, the trigger roles for the promotion lottery and the demotion lottery may be other than those described above, and each trigger role may be set to multiple types of roles.
In addition, the promotion probability and demotion probability when each role is won may be other than those mentioned above.

Next, referring to Figure 17, we will explain the winning probability of the CZ state itself and the winning probability of the second CZ state.

As mentioned above, in the main control unit 10, during a game in the normal game state, a lottery is held to transition to the CZ state itself (step S3 in Figure 14), and if this transition lottery is won, the game state will transition from the normal game state as the first game state to the CZ state as the second game state (the right to transition is granted).
In addition, when the transition lottery for the CZ state itself is won, a transition lottery for the second CZ state (step S5 in Figure 14) is held, and if this transition lottery is won, the transitioned CZ state is controlled in the second CZ state as a specific second game state, and if the transition lottery is not won, the transitioned CZ state is controlled in the first CZ state as the normal second game state.
Also, as mentioned above, the transition lottery for the CZ state itself is carried out based on probability state A, and the transition lottery for the second CZ state is carried out based on probability state B.

First, Figure 17(a) shows the winning probability in the transition lottery to the CZ state itself, which is realized by the control of the main control unit 10, based on the lottery results of the roles during the normal game state.
As shown in Figure 17(a), when probability state A during normal game mode is a CZ low probability state and a weak watermelon role is won, a transition lottery is held so that there is a 90% probability of not winning the CZ state and a 10% probability of winning the CZ state.
Similarly, when probability state A is a CZ high probability state and a weak watermelon role is won, a transition lottery is held so that there is a 70% probability of not winning the CZ state and a 30% probability of winning the CZ state.

In addition, when the probability state A during the normal game state is in the CZ low probability state and a role other than the weak watermelon role is won, there is a 100% probability that the CZ state will not be won, and a transition lottery is conducted so that the CZ state will not be won without fail.
Similarly, when probability state A is in the CZ high probability state and a role other than the weak watermelon role is won, a transition lottery is held so that there is a 90% probability of not winning the CZ state and a 10% probability of winning the CZ state.

As described above, the lottery for transitioning to the CZ state itself is mainly triggered by winning the weak watermelon role, and the probability of winning the CZ state itself is higher in the CZ high probability state than in the CZ low probability state.
Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the winning probability of the CZ state itself based on probability state A.
Furthermore, if a weak watermelon role is won regardless of the state of probability state A, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation, and if a weak watermelon role is won in a high probability CZ state, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of expectation.

Furthermore, during the CZ high probability state, even if a role other than the weak watermelon role is won, there is a possibility of winning the CZ state itself.
Therefore, it is possible to greatly increase the player's sense of expectation in a high CZ probability state.
In addition, the trigger role for the transition lottery to the CZ state itself may be other than the above, and multiple types of roles may be set as the trigger role.
In addition, the probability of winning when the trigger role for the transition lottery to the CZ state itself is won may be other than those mentioned above.

Next, Figure 17(b) shows the winning probability in the lottery for transitioning to the second CZ state when the CZ state is won.
As shown in Figure 17 (b), when probability state B is in the second CZ low probability state and the CZ state is selected, a transition lottery is held so that there is an 80% probability of not being selected in the second CZ state and a 20% probability of being selected in the second CZ state.

Similarly, when probability state B is in the second CZ high probability state and wins the CZ state, a transition lottery is held so that there is a 50% probability of not winning the CZ state and a 50% probability of winning the CZ state.
If the result of the transition lottery is that the second CZ state is selected, the state will transition to the second CZ state, and if the result is that the second CZ state is not selected, the state will transition to the first CZ state.

As described above, if the probability state B at the time of winning the CZ state transition lottery is the second CZ high probability state, the main control unit 10 controls the lottery so that the probability of transitioning to the second CZ state is higher than if it were the second CZ low probability state.
In other words, the main control unit 10, as a game control means, is capable of executing control in a specific first game state (second CZ high probability state) that increases the probability of occurrence of a specific second game state compared to a first game state other than the specific first game state (for example, second CZ low probability state).

Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the probability of transitioning to the second CZ state based on the probability state B.
Furthermore, if the CZ state itself is won during the second CZ high probability state, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of anticipation.
In addition, the probability of winning the transition lottery to the second CZ state may be other than the above, as long as it is higher in the second CZ high probability state than in the second CZ low probability state.

Next, referring to Figure 18, we will explain the lottery for adding the number of games to the number of continuation games in the second CZ high probability state.

As mentioned above, in this second embodiment, probability state B during normal gaming mode transitions to the second CZ low probability state when the main control device 10 is reset (including when the settings are changed), and when a predetermined number of games are played in the second CZ low probability state during normal gaming mode, the state transitions from the second CZ low probability state to the second CZ high probability state. After that, when a predetermined number of games are played in the second CZ high probability state, the state transitions from the second CZ high probability state to the second CZ low probability state, and thereafter, switching control of probability state B is basically performed at similar times.

The number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state is initially set to the basic number of games (for example, 30 games), and when this basic number of games is played during the second CZ high probability state, the second CZ high probability state will end. However, in the game in the second CZ low probability state before transitioning to the second CZ high probability state, an additional lottery (extension lottery) is held to add (add) a predetermined number of games to the basic number of games in the subsequent second CZ high probability state, and if this additional lottery is won, the predetermined number of games will be added (added) to the basic number of games, and the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state will be added and updated in advance.
Therefore, the second CZ low probability state and the second CZ high probability state will alternate during the normal game state, and in each second CZ low probability state, an additional lottery (extension lottery) will be held for the duration of the second CZ high probability state immediately thereafter.

In addition, the above-mentioned additional lottery is continuously executed during the second CZ low probability state, and each time the additional lottery is won, the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state is added and updated in advance.
Therefore, the number of games that continue in the second CZ high probability state is extended until the transition to the second CZ high probability state is uncertain, and the actual number of games that continue changes depending on the result of the additional lottery during the immediately preceding second CZ low probability state.

Figure 18 shows the results of an additional lottery (extension lottery) in a game during the second CZ low probability state, which is realized by the control of the main control unit 10, and shows the probability of adding the number of games (probability of winning) to the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state immediately afterwards.
The above-mentioned additional lottery is executed when a rare role is won in a game during the second CZ low probability state.

As shown in Figure 18, when a weak rare role is won in a game during the second CZ low probability state in normal game mode, an add-on lottery is held in which 0 games are added with an 85% probability (no add-on), 5 games are added with a 10% probability, and 10 games are added with a 5% probability.
In addition, if a strong rare role is won in a game during the second CZ low probability state, an add-on lottery (extension lottery) will be held with a 50% probability of 0 games being added (no add-on), a 40% probability of 5 games being added, and a 10% probability of 10 games being added.

As a result of the above-mentioned additional lottery, the determined number of games will be added to the number of games that will continue in the second CZ high probability state immediately after that. In addition, the number of games that will continue will be added for each additional lottery, and the duration of the second CZ high probability state will be extended accordingly.
In addition, if a weak watermelon role is won during normal game mode, the lottery for transitioning to the CZ state itself will be held separately from the above-mentioned additional lottery, and if the lottery for transitioning to the CZ state itself is won, the result of the above-mentioned additional lottery will be invalidated.

As described above, the main control unit 10 executes a lottery to add to the number of games that will continue in the second CZ high probability state immediately after a game that is in the second CZ low probability state in the normal game state before transitioning to the second CZ high probability state, and if the additional lottery is won, the number of games that will continue in the second CZ high probability state is extended by the number of games that have been added.
In other words, the main control unit 10, which serves as a game control means, is equipped with an extension lottery control means that can execute an extension lottery (additional lottery) that can extend the duration of a specific first game state before the specific first game state (second CZ high probability state) occurs.

Therefore, the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state will change in various ways, making it possible to play an exciting game that changes the player's expectations.
Furthermore, if the duration of the second CZ high probability state is extended by an additional lottery, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation.
Furthermore, since the extension of the duration of the second CZ high probability state is determined in the game during the immediately preceding second CZ low probability state, it is possible to increase the player's expectations and interest in the game from the point during the second CZ low probability state before the transition to the second CZ high probability state.
In addition, the trigger role for the lottery to add the number of games to the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state may be other than the above, or multiple trigger roles may be set, and the winning probability when each trigger role is won may be other than the above.
As described above, various lotteries regarding the CZ state are conducted in the gaming machine of the second embodiment.

[Various effects related to the CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment]
Next, with reference to Figures 19 to 22, various effects related to the CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be explained.
In this second embodiment, the main control unit 10 performs various controls related to the CZ state, and the main control unit 10 transmits control information related to the CZ state to the sub-control unit 20, and the sub-control unit 20 executes various effects by displaying a predetermined effect image related to the CZ state on the main display unit 8 based on the received control information.
In addition, in response to the execution of various effects on the main display 8, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 9, and a predetermined decorative light is output from the lamp 11.

First, referring to Figure 19, we will explain the image presentation on the main display 8 when an additional lottery is held for the number of games continued in the second CZ high probability state during a game in the second CZ low probability state.

As mentioned above, in this second embodiment, the main control unit 10 executes an additional lottery (extension lottery) for the number of continued games in the second CZ high probability state during a game in the second CZ low probability state during normal game play, while the sub-control unit 20 executes an additional effect for the number of continued games by displaying an effect image related to the above additional lottery on the main display 8.

Figure 19 (a) shows a presentation image on the main display 8 in a game during normal gameplay when probability state A is a CZ low probability state and probability state B is a second CZ low probability state.
As shown in FIG. 19(a), during the normal gaming state, a normal gaming state image 30 is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8 to notify that the game is in the normal gaming state.

The normal game state image 30 is configured with the same images as those in the first embodiment described above, and displays, for example, a moving image of a stage in which the main character advances through a grassland.
Furthermore, as mentioned above, during normal game play, the probability of the transition lottery to the pseudo-bonus state can also be changed, so when the probability state of the transition lottery to the pseudo-bonus state is changed from a normal probability state to a high probability state, the background of the stage is changed from a daytime background to an evening background and an announcement is made that the state is now a high probability state.

In this second embodiment, in addition to notifying the probability state related to the transition lottery to the pseudo-bonus state, notification of probability state A and probability state B, which are the probability states related to various transition lotteries in the CZ state, is also performed by changing the normal game state image 30.

That is, as shown in Figure 19 (a), in a game during normal game state in which probability state A is a CZ low probability state and probability state B is a second CZ low probability state, the main character included in the normal game state image 30, character A image 30a wearing blue clothes, will be displayed with a predetermined probability.
The color (blue) of the clothing of this character A image 30a notifies (suggests) that probability state A is a CZ low probability state and probability state B is a second CZ low probability state.

In the above state, if a predetermined rare role is won and probability state A transitions to a CZ high probability state, at a predetermined probability, the main character will be changed to character B image 30b wearing yellow clothes, as shown in the figure, and it will be announced (suggested) that probability state A has become a CZ high probability state and probability state B has become a second CZ low probability state.
However, as will be described in more detail later, when probability state B is the second CZ low probability state, the color of the protagonist character's clothing does not perfectly match that of probability state A, and image selection control is performed so that in the CZ low probability state, there is a high probability that the protagonist character's clothing will be blue, and in the CZ high probability state, there is a high probability that the protagonist character's clothing will be yellow.
In other words, the color of the main character's clothing indicates probability state A.

Next, Figure 19(b) shows the presentation image on the main display 8 when the player wins the lottery to add to the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state described above from the state shown in Figure 19(a) above.
As shown in FIG. 19(b), the main display 8 continues to display the normal game state image 30 including the character A image 30a.

In this state, if the player wins the lottery to add to the number of games that will continue in the second CZ high probability state, a specific image corresponding to the number of games that will be added by winning the lottery to add to the number of games will be displayed.
In this second embodiment, the specific image displayed will be an image of firewood that resembles wood used as fuel, to be used in the presentation during the second CZ high probability state described below.

The firewood image can change depending on the number of added games; for example, if five games are added as the number of added games, a relatively small firewood image is displayed, and if ten games are added as the number of added games, a relatively large firewood image is displayed.
In other words, the display of the firewood image notifies the user in advance of the extended period of the second CZ high probability state.

Figure 19 (b) shows a case where an additional 10 games are added in advance as a result of a lottery to add the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state, so a large firewood image, Firewood A image 31a, is additionally displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the main display 8 along with the game status image 30.
In other words, in a game during normal gameplay when probability state B is the second CZ low probability state, a lottery is held in advance to add to the number of continuing games to the second CZ high probability state to which the game will be immediately transitioned, and a firewood image is displayed corresponding to the number of games that will be added by winning this additional lottery, thereby notifying in advance that a predetermined number of games will be added to the number of continuing games and the duration of the second CZ high probability state will be extended, even before the game transitions to the second CZ high probability state.
In addition, the size of the displayed firewood image also indicates the degree of extension of the duration of the second CZ high probability state.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 19 (b), when the firewood A image 31a appears and is displayed, it is notified in advance that the number of continuing games will be extended by 10 games in the subsequent second CZ high probability state.
The firewood image will continue to be displayed until the transition to the second CZ high probability state occurs.
Furthermore, even when the normal game state image 30 including the character B image 30b is displayed, the firewood image is also displayed in the same manner.

Next, Figure 19(c) shows the presentation image on the main display 8 when the player wins the lottery to add the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state again from the state shown in Figure 19(b) above, and shows the presentation image when the number of additional games is added in advance by 5 games as a result of the lottery to add the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state again.
As shown in Figure 19 (c), when the number of additional games is increased by 5 in advance, a small firewood image, Firewood B image 31b, is displayed at the bottom right of the main display 8 screen, to the left of the already displayed Firewood A image 31a, along with the game status image 30.

Therefore, when the firewood A image 31a and the firewood B image 31b are displayed, it is notified in advance that in the subsequent second CZ high probability state, the number of continuing games will be extended by 15 games, with 10 games and 5 games added.
Also, although not shown in the illustration, if the player wins the lottery to add to the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state again in a subsequent game during the second CZ low probability state, an additional firewood image corresponding to each win will be displayed.
In addition, it is preferable that the number of additional games added to the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state and the firewood image corresponding to the number of additional games are initialized when the game area transitions to the normal area.

As described above, under the control of the main control unit 10, if a player wins the lottery to add to the number of games to be played in the second CZ high probability state (extension lottery) during a game in the second CZ low probability state, the sub-control unit 20 will cause the firewood image corresponding to the win to appear and display on the main display 8, thereby notifying the player in advance that the number of games to be played in the second CZ high probability state will be extended and the number of games to be added, even before the game transitions to the second CZ high probability state.
In other words, the sub-controller 20 is equipped with a notification control means that can notify information (firewood image) regarding the extension of the duration of the specific first gaming state (second CZ high probability state) before the specific first gaming state occurs, based on the results of the extension lottery by the main controller 10 as an extension lottery control means.

Therefore, it is possible to reliably increase the player's sense of expectation from a game that is in the second CZ low probability state and has not yet transitioned to the second CZ high probability state.
Furthermore, it is possible to execute a highly entertaining game in which the player's sense of expectation changes depending on the size of the displayed firewood image.
Furthermore, since the player can see the firewood image appear before the transition to the second CZ high probability state, it is possible to prevent situations that would put the player at a disadvantage, such as ending the game before the transition to the second CZ high probability state, even though the second CZ high probability state will be extended thereafter.

Furthermore, if a player wins the lottery to add to the number of games that will continue in the second CZ high probability state during a game in the second CZ low probability state, an additional firewood image corresponding to each win will be displayed, and the number of games that will be played will be announced in advance for each additional game that will continue in the second CZ high probability state.
Therefore, the player can confirm that the number of games that can continue in the high probability state of the second CZ has been extended each time by adding the firewood image, and it becomes possible to play a highly entertaining game in which the player's expectations gradually increase.
Furthermore, when a plurality of firewood images are displayed, it is possible to significantly increase the player's sense of expectation.

In this second embodiment, the lottery results for the number of games continued in the second CZ high probability state are announced by displaying a firewood image, but the manner in which the lottery results for the number of games continued in the second CZ high probability state can be announced in a manner other than the above.For example, the same firewood image can be displayed regardless of the number of added games, or one firewood image can be displayed and changed to a larger one each time the number of games is added.
In addition, the numerical information of the number of added games may be displayed as is.
Furthermore, although the number of games to be added is notified by the image of firewood, the number of games to be added may be notified by displaying other images.

Next, referring to Figure 20, we will explain the image effects displayed on the main display 8 when the number of games in the second CZ high probability state is extended during a game in the second CZ high probability state.

As mentioned above, in this second embodiment, when the main control unit 10 is in the second CZ high probability state, if a decision is made to transition to the CZ state at that time, the probability of transitioning to the second CZ state increases, but the number of games that continue in this second CZ high probability state is extended by adding the number of games added during the second CZ low probability state to the basic number of games.
In addition, the sub-control device 20 is configured to execute various effects on the main display 8 to notify the player of the second CZ high probability state and the extension of the duration of the second CZ high probability state.

First, Figure 20 (a) shows the presentation image on the main display 8 in a game during normal gameplay when probability state A is a CZ low probability state and probability state B is a second CZ high probability state.
As shown in FIG. 20(a), during the normal game mode, a normal game mode image 30 is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8 to notify that the game is in the normal game mode, as described above.
In addition, there are cases where probability state B becomes the second CZ high probability state and probability state A becomes the CZ high probability state, but this will be discussed later.

In addition, in a game during the normal game state in which the probability state B is the second CZ high probability state, the main character included in the normal game state image 30 will be displayed as a character C image 30c wearing red clothes.
The color (red) of the clothing of this character C image 30c indicates that the probability state B has become the second CZ high probability state.
Furthermore, when probability state B is the second CZ high probability state, character C image 30c will be displayed regardless of the state of probability state A.

In addition, the main display 8 will continue to display the firewood image that was displayed in the second CZ low probability state. Figure 20(a) shows the case where the firewood A image 31a and the firewood B image 31b are displayed, so in this second CZ high probability state, it will be announced that 10 games and 5 games will be added to the basic number of games.

In addition, a predetermined image is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the main display 8 to notify that the current probability state B is the second CZ high probability state and the duration of the second CZ high probability state.
In this second embodiment, a flame image resembling a flame is displayed as the specified image, and the display of this flame image notifies the player of the second CZ high probability state and its duration.

In addition, the flame images are provided in large, medium and small sizes, and the largest size flame image is displayed at the beginning of the second CZ high probability state, and when the number of continuing games in the second CZ high probability state becomes 10 games remaining, it is changed to a medium size flame image, and when the number of continuing games becomes 5 games remaining, it is changed to the smallest size flame image, and finally when there are no more continuing games left, the flame image is erased and the end of the second CZ high probability state is announced.
Therefore, since Figure 20 (a) shows the initial state when the transition to the second CZ high probability state has occurred, the largest size (size corresponding to the basic number of games) of the large flame A image 32a will be displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the main display 8.
The large flame A image 32a is colored orange, and as will be described in detail later, this color changes depending on the probability state A at that time.

Then, when the game is played during the second CZ high probability state and there are five games remaining, the image is changed to the smallest size, small flame A image 32b, as shown in Figure 20 (b).
In other words, the presence or absence of a flame image indicates whether or not the second CZ high probability state is in effect, and the size of the flame image indicates (suggests) the number of games remaining for which the second CZ high probability state will continue.

Also, as shown in Figure 20(b), if a firewood image is displayed when there are five games remaining to continue, i.e., if there are unadded games, an extension effect will be executed accompanied by a video showing the firewood B image 31b with the smallest added game count being dropped into the small flame A image 32b.

When the extension effect is executed, the flame image is changed from the small flame A image 32b to a medium-sized medium flame A image 32c, as shown in FIG. 20(c).
In other words, since the firewood B image 31b corresponds to 5 additional games, 5 games are added to the remaining number of continuing games (5 games), and the change to the medium flame A image 32c notifies the user that the remaining number of continuing games has been extended to 10 games.
In this way, the flame image does not have the additional number of games added from the beginning, but the size of the flame image corresponds to the remaining number of games to continue before the additional number of games is added, and the image can be changed from a small flame image to a medium flame image, or from a small flame image to a large flame image, depending on the number of games added.

Although not shown in the figure, when the number of remaining games again becomes 5 as the game is played thereafter, an extension effect is again executed in which the firewood A image 31a, which corresponds to the additional 10 remaining games, is inserted into the small flame A image 32b, and at this time the flame image is changed from the small flame A image 32b to the large flame A image 32a.
In addition, in order for the sub-controller 20 to perform the effect of changing the flame image, it is preferable to manage information regarding the duration of the second CZ high probability state separately as the number of continuing games before the addition, the number of added games per addition lottery, and the number of continuing games after the addition.
Furthermore, the order in which the firewood images are added to the flame image (the order in which they are added on top of each other) may be other than the above.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the display of the character C image 30c and the flame image notifies the player that the second CZ high probability state is in progress.
Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the player is aware that the second CZ is in a high probability state, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation.
In addition, the size of the flame image indicates the duration of the second CZ high probability state (the number of remaining continuing games).
Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind while checking the duration of the second CZ high probability state.

Furthermore, when the flame image becomes smaller, an extension effect is executed in which a firewood image corresponding to the extension period of the second CZ high probability state is displayed, thereby announcing that the second CZ high probability state has been extended by adding to the number of games.
In other words, the sub-controller 20, which serves as a notification control means, is capable of executing effects relating to the extension of the specific first game state by using a first image (flame image) that can notify the duration of the specific first game state (second CZ high probability state) displayed on the display means (main display 8), and a second image (firewood image) that can notify the extension period of the specific first game state displayed on the display means.
Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to recognize in a highly interesting manner that the second CZ high probability state has been extended, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the presence of the firewood image provides advance notification that the high probability state of the second CZ will be extended.
Therefore, if a firewood image is present, the player can safely play during the second CZ high probability state.

Next, referring to Figure 21, we will explain the image presentation on the main display 8 when probability state A is changed in a game where probability state B is in the second CZ high probability state.

As mentioned above, in this second embodiment, the main control unit 10 controls (manages) probability state A and probability state B separately, resulting in a situation where probability state B is the second CZ high probability state and probability state A is the CZ low probability state, and a situation where probability state B is the second CZ high probability state and probability state A is the CZ high probability state.
In addition, the sub-control device 20 is configured to execute various effects on the main display 8 to notify the state when the probability state A is changed in the second CZ high probability state.

First, Figure 21(a) shows the image displayed on the main display 8 during normal gameplay when probability state A is a CZ high probability state and probability state B is a second CZ high probability state, i.e., a CZ overlap high probability state (timings t3 to t5 in Figure 15), particularly at the beginning of the second CZ high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 21(a), during the normal game mode, a normal game mode image 30 is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8 to notify that the game is in the normal game mode, as described above.
At this time, if the probability state B is the second CZ high probability state, the main character included in the normal game state image 30 will be displayed as a character C image 30c wearing red clothes.
Also, in FIG. 20(a), a state is shown in which 10 games and 5 games are added thereafter, so that a firewood A image 31a and a firewood B image 31b are displayed.

In addition, a flame image will be displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the main display 8, and when probability state A is a CZ high probability state (CZ overlap high probability state), this flame image will be displayed as a large flame B image 32d colored blue, as shown in the figure.
In other words, when the current probability state A is a CZ low probability state, the color scheme of the flame image is such that a large flame A image 32a colored in orange is displayed, but when it is a CZ high probability state, a large flame B image 32d colored in blue is displayed.

This notifies that probability state A is a CZ high probability state, and that the transition lottery to the CZ state itself will be executed with a high probability, and further that probability state B is a second CZ high probability state, and that the transition lottery to the second CZ state will be executed with a high probability.
Furthermore, even if the size of the flame image changes due to a decrease in the number of continuing games or if an extension effect is executed, the color scheme of the flame image will be maintained, and for example, the large flame B image 32d will be changed to a medium flame B image (or small flame B image) while maintaining the blue color scheme.

Next, Figure 21 (b) shows the presentation image on the main display 8 during normal game play when probability state B is in the second CZ high probability state and probability state A transitions from the CZ high probability state to the CZ low probability state.

As shown in Figure 21 (b), when probability state B is in the second CZ high probability state and probability state A transitions from the CZ high probability state to the CZ low probability state, the color scheme of the blue large flame B image 32d that had been displayed until then changes and the orange large flame A image 32a is displayed.
This notifies the player that probability state B is a second CZ high probability state, and the transition lottery to the second CZ state will be executed with a high probability, but that probability state A is a CZ low probability state, and the transition lottery to the CZ state itself will be executed with a normal probability.

As described above, the sub-control unit 20 displays a flame image and further turns the flame image blue, thereby notifying that probability state B is a second CZ high probability state and that probability state A is a CZ high probability state.
In other words, the sub-controller 20 is equipped with a duplicate notification control means that can notify that it is controlled to a specific first gaming state (second CZ high probability state) and also to a high probability first gaming state (CZ high probability state).

Therefore, the player can reliably recognize that probability state B is the second CZ high probability state and probability state A is the CZ high probability state, which makes it possible to greatly increase the player's sense of expectation.
Furthermore, the appearance of the flame image indicates that probability state B is a second CZ high probability state, and the color scheme (blue) of the displayed flame image indicates that probability state A is a CZ high probability state, so the player can recognize at a glance that both probability states are high probability states, making it possible to provide more efficient and effective notifications.

In addition, by changing the color scheme of the flame image, a state change in probability state A is notified while the second CZ high probability state is still being notified.
Therefore, the change in probability state A during the second CZ high probability state can be notified without any sense of incongruity, allowing the player to recognize both probability states while remaining focused on the game.

Although the color scheme of the flame image is used to indicate a change in the state of probability state A, the pattern or shape of the flame image may also be changed to indicate a change in the state of probability state A.
In addition, various effects related to the CZ state may be executed by the sub-display 17, or may be executed by both the main display 8 and the sub-display 17.

Next, referring to Figure 22, we will explain the control of various effect images according to probability state A and probability state B.
As mentioned above, the sub-controller 20 notifies players regarding probability state A and probability state B by changing the image of the main character and the flame image in the normal game state image 30 on the main display 8 based on control information from the main controller 10.

In other words, in the second CZ low probability state, the sub-control unit 20 selects the color scheme of the protagonist character's clothing with a predetermined probability according to the probability state A, thereby notifying (suggesting) the probability state A in the second CZ low probability state.
On the other hand, in the second CZ high probability state, the color scheme of the flame image is selected with a predetermined probability according to the probability state A, so as to notify the player of the probability state A in the second CZ high probability state.

Figure 22 shows the selection rate of each effect image by the sub-controller 20, and indicates the probability of maintaining or changing the color scheme of the main character's clothing in a game during the second CZ low probability state, and the probability of maintaining or changing the color scheme of the flame image in a game during the second CZ high probability state.

First, Figures 22(a) and 22(b) show the probability of maintaining or changing the color scheme of the main character's clothing during a game in the second CZ low probability state.

As shown in Figure 22 (a), in a game in the second CZ low probability state in the normal game state, when a character A image (e.g., character A image 30a in Figure 19) in which the main character's clothing is blue is displayed, if the probability state A at that time is the CZ low probability state, it is decided with a 95% probability that the character A image will be maintained, and with a 5% probability that it will be changed to a character B image (e.g., character B image 30b in Figure 19) in which the clothing is yellow.
Similarly, if the current probability state A is a CZ high probability state, it is decided with a 60% probability that the character A image will be maintained, and with a 40% probability that it will be changed to the character B image.

Also, as shown in Figure 22 (b), in a game during the second CZ low probability state in the normal game state, when the character B image is displayed and the probability state A at that time is the CZ low probability state, it is decided with a 30% probability that the character B image will be maintained, and with a 70% probability that it will be changed to the character A image.
Similarly, if the probability state A at that time is a CZ high probability state, it is decided with a 90% probability to maintain the character B image, and with a 10% probability to change to the character A image.

Based on the above probabilities, it is determined whether the color scheme of the main character's clothing will be maintained or changed during a game in the second CZ low probability state. Therefore, if the color of the main character's clothing is blue, there is a higher possibility that the probability state A at that time will be the CZ low probability state, and if the color of the main character's clothing is yellow, there is a higher possibility that the probability state A at that time will be the CZ high probability state.
In other words, during the second CZ low probability state, the color of the main character's clothing indicates whether probability state A is a CZ low probability state or a CZ high probability state.

Next, Figures 22(c) and 22(d) show the probability of maintaining or changing the color scheme of the flame image in a game during the second CZ high probability state.

As shown in Figure 22 (c), in a game during the second CZ high probability state in the normal game state, when a flame A image (e.g., large flame A image 32a in Figure 21) in which the color scheme of the flame image is orange is displayed, if the probability state A at that time is a CZ low probability state, it is decided with a 100% probability to maintain the flame A image, and with a 0% probability to change to a flame B image (e.g., large flame B image 32d in Figure 21) in which the color scheme is blue.
Similarly, if the probability state A at that time is a CZ high probability state, i.e., a CZ overlap high probability state, it is decided with a 0% probability to maintain the flame A image, and with a 100% probability to change to the flame B image.

Also, as shown in Figure 22 (d), in a game during the second CZ high probability state in the normal game state, when the flame B image is displayed and the probability state A at that time is the CZ low probability state, it is decided with a probability of 0% to maintain the flame B image, and with a probability of 100% to change to the flame A image.
Similarly, if the probability state A at that time is a CZ high probability state, i.e., a CZ overlap high probability state, it is decided with a 100% probability to maintain the flame B image, and with a 0% probability to change to the flame A image.

The above probabilities determine whether the color scheme of the flame image will be maintained or changed during a game in the second CZ high probability state during normal gameplay. Therefore, if the flame image is orange, it is determined that the current probability state A is a CZ low probability state, and if the flame image is blue, it is determined that the current probability state A is a CZ high probability state.

In other words, during the second CZ high probability state, the color scheme of the flame image will be selected with a different probability than the probability of selecting the color scheme of the main character's clothing during the second CZ low probability state, and as a result, the color scheme of the flame image will definitively indicate whether probability state A is a CZ low probability state or a CZ high probability state.
Although not shown in the figure, during the second CZ high probability state, the main character's clothing will always (with a 100% probability) be changed to an image showing red (for example, character C image 30c in Figure 20).

As described above, the sub-controller 20 controls the display of the main character's image and the flame image, so that the color scheme of the main character's clothing (yellow) during the second CZ low probability state does not notify with 100% probability that the probability state A is a CZ high probability state, but the color scheme of the flame image (blue) during the second CZ high probability state does not notify with 100% probability that the probability state A is a CZ high probability state.
As a result, during the second CZ low probability state, the color of the main character's clothing indicates whether probability state A is a CZ low probability state or a CZ high probability state, whereas during the second CZ high probability state, the color scheme of the flame image definitively indicates whether probability state A is a CZ low probability state or a CZ high probability state.

In other words, the sub-controller 20 is equipped with a state notification control means that can notify with different probabilities that it is controlled to a high probability first gaming state (CZ high probability state) depending on whether it is controlled to a specific first gaming state or not.
Therefore, depending on the state of probability state B, the notification mode related to the state of probability state A changes in various ways, creating a more distinct notification mode, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, during the second CZ low probability state, it is indicated whether probability state A is in a CZ low probability state or a CZ high probability state, allowing the player to enjoy playing while predicting the state of probability state A.
On the other hand, during the second CZ high probability state, the player's sense of expectation increases, and by accurately notifying the state related to probability state A, it is possible to more effectively increase the player's sense of expectation. In particular, it is possible to significantly increase the player's sense of expectation during the CZ overlap high probability state.
The probability of changing and maintaining the image of the main character and the flame image may be other than those described above as long as the above-mentioned tendency can be formed.
As described above, various effects related to the CZ state are executed in the gaming machine of the second embodiment.

The above describes the second embodiment of the slot machine 1. In the second embodiment, a state change related to probability state B is performed every time a predetermined number of games are played, but the state change related to probability state B may also be performed based on the drawing of a predetermined role.
In addition, the cycle of transitioning to the second CZ high probability state is set to be repeated from the point of transition to the advantageous zone, but if the CZ state, pseudo bonus state, or AT state occurs, the repetition may also be set to start from the point of completion of each game state.

Furthermore, even if there is an additional number of games in the second CZ high probability state, if the CZ state is won before the transition to the second CZ high probability state, the additional number of games may be carried over to the game after the CZ state ends, or may be cleared. Furthermore, if the pseudo-bonus state is won during the CZ state, a bonus may be awarded based on the remaining number of additional games. For example, a predetermined number of games may be added to the initial number of games in the pseudo-bonus state.
In addition, if a pseudo-bonus state is won during the second CZ state, a pseudo-bonus state with a higher degree of advantage may be generated than if a pseudo-bonus state is won during the first CZ state.
The slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is configured as described above.

Third Embodiment
Next, a third embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

In the gaming machine of the third embodiment (slot machine 1), only some of the controls related to the progress of the game and some of the presentation content are different from those of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and the rest is the same as in the first embodiment.
Therefore, in this third embodiment, only the points that are different from the first embodiment will be described, and the other points are the same as the first embodiment described above, so the description will be omitted.

[Freeze game in the gaming machine of the third embodiment]
First, the freeze game in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, a freeze game can be executed in a predetermined game under the control of the main control device 10.
Freeze play is a game in which the progress of a specified game is temporarily prohibited (stopped) while it is being played, and is set up as a game in which the player cannot stop reel 4 or end the game itself by operating it.
During the freeze game, it is possible to execute effects relating to the lottery results of the winning combination or the lottery results of the special bonus (pseudo bonus state, AT state).

Therefore, if a freeze game is executed during game execution, even after the start lever 3 has been operated to start the game, the stop control of the reels 4 will be disabled even if the player operates the stop button 5, and the game will be prohibited from progressing during that time.

In addition, the sub-controller 20 receives control information related to freeze play from the main controller 10 and controls the main display 8, sub-display 17, speaker 9, and lamp 11 to execute freeze effects corresponding to freeze play.
In particular, in this third embodiment, details of which will be described later, when a freeze effect is executed on the main display 8, it is possible to execute an effect that notifies of a role different from the result of the lottery for the role at that time.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 1 of this third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the sub-controller 20 is capable of executing a winning effect based on the result of the lottery for the winning role while the game is being played, and the winning role is announced by executing the winning effect.
That is, the sub-controller 20 is provided with a notification control means capable of executing control to execute a predetermined notification based on the lottery result of the lottery means (main controller 10).

First, various state transitions when a freeze game is executed in a predetermined game will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 23 shows the state of accepting input from the stop button 5, the state of rotation of the reel 4, and the transition of the effects on the main display 8 when a freeze game is executed in a predetermined game.
In the third embodiment, a freeze game is executed in some games when a rare combination is won.

As shown in FIG. 23, when the game is started (timing t10) by the player operating the start lever 3 (start operation), the reels 4 start to rotate (forward rotation).
Furthermore, after a predetermined time (including the wait time) has elapsed since the start operation, the reel 4 that has started to rotate will transition to a steady rotation, but normally, at the point when the reel 4 transitions to a steady rotation, input of the stop button 5 is enabled, making it possible to stop the reel 4.

However, if the result of the lottery at the start of the game is, for example, a strong cherry role, and it is decided to execute a freeze game in the game, as shown in the figure, the input of the stop button 5 will not be enabled, the invalid state will continue, and the freeze game will be executed.
Although details will be described later, the freeze game continues to be executed until a predetermined freeze time has elapsed, and once the freeze time has elapsed, the game will transition to the main game (timing t11).

Therefore, from the time the game starts until the freeze time has elapsed (timing t10 to t11), a freeze game is executed in which the progress of the game through player operations is prohibited.
That is, the main control device 10 as a game control means is provided with freeze game control means that can execute a freeze game in which the progress of a predetermined game is prohibited for a predetermined period of time while the predetermined game is being executed.

Furthermore, when a strong cherry role is won by playing the game, a winning effect may be executed as shown in the first embodiment. Normally, this winning effect would execute an effect to notify the cherry role (or notify the strong cherry role) in response to the winning of the strong cherry role, but when a freeze game is executed, a freeze effect is executed on the main display 8 during the freeze game to notify a role other than the strong cherry role (fake notification).
Furthermore, when a freeze game is executed, the freeze effect is performed in the same way as when a normal winning effect is executed, except that the color of the light inside the stop button 5 does not change to the color (blue) indicating that it is active, and furthermore, during the freeze game, the rotation pattern of the reel 4 is the same as in a normal game.

As a result, the player will perceive the freeze effect as a normal winning effect being executed, and will perform a stop operation to aim for the role that was falsely notified during the freeze game. However, because input from the stop button 5 is disabled during the freeze game, even if a stop operation is performed, reel 4 will not stop, and reel 4 will continue to spin.

In addition, Figure 23 shows a case where a watermelon role is announced as a role different from the strong cherry role, and as will be described in detail later, the announcement mode during the freeze performance will be selected from among multiple announcement modes under the control of the sub-control unit 20.
During the freeze game, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 9, and the lamp 11 emits light in a predetermined manner.

Next, when the time elapsed since the start of the freeze game reaches the freeze time, the freeze game ends and the game transitions to the main game (normal game), and at that point (timing t11), input of the stop button 5 is enabled, making it possible to stop the reel 4.
Also, when this game starts, the watermelon role notification (fake notification) that had been executed up until then ends, and a winning effect corresponding to the winning of a strong cherry role starts, and a winning effect that notifies of a cherry role (or a strong cherry role) is executed on the main display 8.

As a result, the player can check the winning combination notified during the game and perform the stop operation aimed at the corresponding combination. When each stop button 5 is operated (timing t12), all reels 4 will stop (the symbol combination corresponding to the Strong Cherry combination will stop) and a winning combination will be determined. If all appropriate stop operations have been performed to win the winning combination, the winning combination (Strong Cherry combination) will be confirmed.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, when a freeze game is executed in a game in which a winning effect based on the result of a role lottery is executed, a fake notification is executed during the freeze game to notify of a role different from the winning role.
In other words, the sub-controller 20 as an alarm control means is equipped with a specific alarm control means that, when executing an alarm corresponding to the lottery result in the lottery means (main controller 10) in a game, if a freeze game is executed, can execute a specific alarm (fake alarm) different from the lottery result in the lottery means during the execution of the freeze game.

Therefore, by performing freeze play and fake notifications during that time, it is possible to make the game more diverse and more interesting.
Furthermore, a player who thinks that a normal game is being played can be made to realize that a freeze game is being played when the stop button 5 is operated, and it is possible to play an exciting game that will surprise the player.

The main control unit 10 is configured to execute a freeze game in a game in which a rare role is won, but the freeze game may be executed in all games in which a rare role is won, or may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%) in games in which a rare role is won.
Furthermore, the rare combination that triggers the execution of the freeze game may be all or some of the weak watermelon combination, strong watermelon combination, chance combination, weak cherry combination, and strong cherry combination.
In addition, freeze play may be performed in all or some of the games in which a rare role set as the winning trigger role for a special benefit (CZ state, pseudo bonus state, AT state) is won.

In addition, when a rare role is won, it may be possible to determine whether or not to execute a freeze game depending on whether or not a bonus is awarded. For example, when a strong cherry role is won, if the player wins the lottery to transition to a pseudo bonus state, a freeze game may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 60%), and if the player does not win the lottery to transition to a pseudo bonus state, a freeze game may be executed with a lower probability (for example, 40%).
In addition, the probability of executing the freeze game may be changed depending on the type of rare combination that has been won, or the freeze game may be executed for combinations other than rare combinations.
The notification mode for the watermelon and cherry roles may be any mode that allows the player to recognize the winning role, and may be such that the notification can distinguish between a weak watermelon role (or a weak cherry role) and a strong watermelon role (or a strong cherry role).

Next, the execution time of the freeze game will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in this third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, a lottery is held to transition to a pseudo-bonus state based on the winning of a strong cherry role, and if the transition lottery is won, the game state transitions to the pseudo-bonus state.
That is, the main control device 10 is provided with a special game state occurrence determination means that can determine whether or not to generate a special game state (pseudo bonus state) that is advantageous to the player based on the lottery result of the lottery means.

In a game in which a strong cherry role is won, in addition to the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state, a lottery is also held to determine whether or not to execute a freeze game.If the result of this lottery is that a freeze game is executed, the progress of the game will be stopped for a predetermined period of time.However, in the main control device 10 of this third embodiment, the freeze time, which is the predetermined period during which this freeze game is executed, can be changed depending on the result of the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state at that time.
Therefore, when a freeze game is executed, the duration of the freeze game will change depending on the result of the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state at that time.

FIG. 24 shows the selection probability of the freeze time when it is decided to execute a freeze game in a game in which a strong cherry role is won.
In this third embodiment, the freeze time can be set to either 5 seconds or 10 seconds, and the main control unit 10 selects the freeze time by drawing a predetermined random number when a strong cherry role is won.

As shown in Figure 24, if the strong cherry role is won but the transition lottery to the pseudo bonus state is not won, a lottery is held to select the freeze time, with an 80% probability of determining the freeze time to 5 seconds and a 20% probability of determining the freeze time to 10 seconds.
In addition, if the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state is won when the strong cherry role is won, a lottery for selecting the freeze time is held, with a 50% probability of determining the freeze time to 5 seconds and a 50% probability of determining the freeze time to 10 seconds.

The freeze game will continue for the freeze time determined by the above selection lottery, during which time game progress is prohibited and the freeze effect will be executed.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, the freeze time for freeze play is set to 5 or 10 seconds, and the freeze time is selected based on the results of the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state.
In other words, the main control unit 10, which serves as a freeze game control means, selects the execution time of the freeze game from among a plurality of execution times, and enables the freeze game to be executed at the selected execution time, and enables the selection of the execution time of the freeze game to be executed based on the determination result of the special game state occurrence determination means (main control unit 10).

Therefore, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of freeze games with different freeze times, and it becomes possible to execute a more diverse and interesting freeze game.
Furthermore, the execution time of the freeze game changes depending on whether the transition lottery to the pseudo-bonus state is successful or not, so it is possible to execute a highly entertaining game in which the player's expectations change depending on the execution time of the freeze game.
Furthermore, if the player wins the lottery to transition to the pseudo-bonus state, the probability that a longer freeze time will be selected increases compared to when the player does not win.
Therefore, if the freeze game continues for a long time, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation for the transition to the pseudo bonus state.

The freeze time may be other than the above, and three or more types of freeze time may be provided.
In addition, a freeze game is executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%) in a game in which a strong cherry role is won, but it may also be configured so that a freeze game is executed in all games in which a strong cherry role is won.

Also, if a strong cherry role is won but the lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state is not won, a freeze game may be executed with a first probability (e.g., 40%), and if the lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state is won, a freeze game may be executed with a second probability higher than the first probability (e.g., 60%).

In addition, a freeze game may be possible in a game in which a role other than a strong cherry role is won, for example, a freeze game may be possible in a game in which a strong watermelon role is won.
Also, when a freeze game is performed in a game in which a strong watermelon role is won, the freeze time may be determined based on the results of the CZ state transition lottery held when the strong watermelon role is won, as described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the notification mode during freeze game will be described.
As mentioned above, when a freeze game is executed in a specified game, a freeze effect is executed under the control of the sub-control device 20, and a fake notification different from the winning role at that time is made on the main display device 8. However, in this third embodiment, when this fake notification is executed, the type of fake notification can be changed depending on the freeze time at that time.

In other words, multiple notification modes are set for the fake notification, and when a freeze game is executed, one of the multiple notification modes is selected and executed depending on the freeze time at that time, making it possible to change the mode of the fake notification.

FIG. 25 shows the probability of executing a freeze game based on winning a strong cherry role, and the probability of selecting a notification mode in a freeze game when the freeze time is determined.
In this third embodiment, three types of notification modes are set during freeze play: "Watermelon role,""Chancerole," and "Watermelon role → Chance role." The sub-control device 20 selects the notification mode by drawing a predetermined random number when determining the freeze time.

In the table, "Watermelon role" indicates the notification of a watermelon role, "Chance role" indicates the notification of a chance role, and "Watermelon role → Chance role" indicates a pattern in which the role notified during freeze play changes from a watermelon role to a chance role.
That is, in this third embodiment, a notification mode is set in which a watermelon role is first notified during freeze play, and after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, the notification target is changed to notify a chance role.

As shown in Figure 25, when the freeze time of the freeze game is 5 seconds, a selection lottery is held to determine the notification mode such that the "watermelon role" is determined with an 80% probability, the "chance role" is determined with a 20% probability, and the "watermelon role → chance role" is determined with a 0% probability.
Furthermore, when the freeze time of the freeze game is 10 seconds, a selection lottery is performed to select the notification mode such that the "watermelon role" is determined with a 30% probability, the "chance role" is determined with a 60% probability, and the "watermelon role → chance role" is determined with a 10% probability.
The freeze effect is executed according to the notification mode determined by the above-mentioned selection lottery.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of this third embodiment, the notification modes for fake notifications during freeze play are "watermelon role,""chancerole," or "watermelon role → chance role," and the notification mode is selected based on the results of the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state.
In other words, the sub-controller 20, which serves as a specific notification control means, is capable of selecting any one of a plurality of notification modes to execute a specific notification (fake notification), and is capable of selecting the notification mode in the specific notification (fake notification) based on the determination result of the special game state occurrence determination means (main controller 10).

Therefore, the fake notification can be changed in various ways, making it possible to carry out a more diverse and interesting freeze game.
In addition, the fake notification changes depending on whether the transition lottery to the pseudo bonus state is successful or not, making it possible to play a highly entertaining game in which the player's expectations change depending on the type of fake notification.

Furthermore, when the freeze time is 10 seconds, the probability of selecting something other than the "watermelon role"("chancerole" or "watermelon role → chance role") is higher than when it is 5 seconds.
As mentioned above, when the freeze time is 10 seconds, the probability of winning the lottery to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is higher than when it is 5 seconds, so when the probability of winning the lottery to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is high, the probability of selecting something other than the ``watermelon role'' increases.
Therefore, when a role other than the "watermelon role" is selected, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation for the transition to the pseudo-bonus state.

Furthermore, if the freeze time is 10 seconds, there is a possibility that the "watermelon role -> chance role" will be selected, which would not be selected if the freeze time was 5 seconds.
That is, the sub-controller 20 as a specific notification control means can select a notification mode in a specific notification (fake notification) that switches from a predetermined notification mode to a different notification mode.
Therefore, it is possible to implement highly entertaining effects such as the fake notification changing midway through, and when the "watermelon role → chance role" is selected, it is possible to further increase the player's anticipation for the transition to the pseudo-bonus state.

In addition, the fake notification can be anything that allows the player to recognize the target role, and can display an item image corresponding to each role, an image with a color scheme corresponding to each role, text information corresponding to each role, etc.
Furthermore, although the selection of fake notifications is controlled based on the freeze time during freeze play, the selection of fake notifications may also be controlled based on whether or not a pseudo bonus state has been won.
Furthermore, the selection probability of each fake notification may be other than the above.

In addition, the selection control of fake alerts is performed by the sub-controller 20, but the selection control may also be performed by the main controller 10, and the fake alert may be performed by transmitting control information specifying the selection result to the sub-controller 20.
As described above, the freeze game is executed in the gaming machine of the third embodiment.

[Effective image during freeze game in the gaming machine of the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, an effect image during freeze game in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described.
In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, the sub-controller 20 controls the slot machine 1 based on control information received from the main controller 10, and thereby enables a freeze effect to be executed during a freeze game.

For example, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the main display 8 to execute a freeze effect.
The control information transmitted from the main control unit 10 includes at least information instructing the execution of a freeze game, information specifying the freeze time, and information specifying the winning role at that time, and may be any information that enables the sub-control unit 20 to execute a freeze effect.

Figure 26 shows the freeze effect when a strong cherry role is won and a freeze game is executed, and shows the effect image on the main display 8 when the freeze time is determined to be 5 seconds (see Figure 24) and the fake notification type is determined to be the ``watermelon role'' (see Figure 25).
Therefore, if a fake notification mode other than the "watermelon role" is selected, a fake notification different from the one shown in the figure will be made.

First, as shown in Figure 26 (a), when a game in which freeze play is executed is started, the progress of the game is prohibited and a freeze effect is started, and a fake notification image 40a consisting of text information ``Aim for the watermelon!'' corresponding to the watermelon role is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8 as a fake notification.
In other words, since the result of the lottery for the role in this game is a strong cherry role, in a normal game a winning effect is executed to notify the player that a strong cherry role (or cherry role) has been won, but when a freeze effect is executed, a fake notification is made corresponding to a watermelon role (weak watermelon role or strong watermelon role) that is different from the strong cherry role.

However, since the notification mode of the role during the fake notification is almost the same as the notification mode of the role during the winning effect when a watermelon role (weak watermelon role or strong watermelon role) is won in a normal game, it is difficult for the player to recognize that a freeze effect is being performed at the start of the game, and so the player will perform the stopping operation of reel 4 aiming for the watermelon role, just like in a normal game.
The only difference between the freeze game and the winning effect is that the stop button 5 emits an inactive notification light during the freeze game.

However, during this period, the progress of the game is prohibited and input of the stop button 5 is invalid, so even if an operation to stop the reel 4 is performed in order to get the watermelon role, the reel 4 will not stop but will continue to rotate.
Therefore, when the reel 4 is stopped, the player will realize that a freeze game is being executed.

The period during which the fake notification is made can be any time from the start of the game until the freeze game is being executed, and the fake notification can be made from the time the start operation is performed until the freeze game ends (timing t10 to t11 in Figure 23), or from the time the wait time has elapsed (the time reel 4 starts to rotate) until the freeze game ends.
Furthermore, although a presentation image corresponding to the watermelon role is displayed as the fake notification image 40a, presentation images corresponding to the weak watermelon role and the strong watermelon role may be provided, and either one may be selectively displayed.
Also, although not shown in the figures, during the freeze effect, in addition to the fake notification image 40a, a predetermined decorative image will be displayed.

Then, as shown in Figure 26 (b), when the freeze time (5 seconds) in the freeze game has elapsed, the freeze effect (fake notification) ends with the end of the freeze game, and the winning effect is executed with the start of the main game, and notification of the role corresponding to the winning role in the game begins.
In Figure 26 (b), since the game has been won with a strong cherry role, a winning role notification image 40b consisting of text information corresponding to the strong cherry role, "Aim for the cherry!", is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8 to notify of the winning role.
Although an effect image corresponding to the cherry role is displayed as the winning role notification image 40b, effect images corresponding to the weak cherry role and the strong cherry role may be provided, and one of them may be selectively displayed depending on the winning role.

In addition, when switching from freeze play to main play, as shown in the figure, the winning combination notification image 40b begins to be displayed, and a video is displayed in which the fake notification image 40a that had been displayed until then is flipped off the screen, thereby notifying the end of freeze play.

Then, by transitioning to the main game, input of the stop button 5 is enabled, allowing the game to proceed, and when the player sees the winning combination notification image 40b, they will recognize the winning combination in that game and perform the operation to stop the reels 4 in order to achieve the winning combination.

Although not shown in the figure, when "Watermelon role → Chance role" is selected as the notification mode for the fake notification, after a predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed since the fake notification image 40a was displayed, it will be switched to a fake notification image corresponding to the chance role, and after another predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed, it will be switched to the winning role notification image 40b in the same manner as above.
In this case, when the fake notification image 40a is switched to the fake notification image corresponding to the chance role, the same effect as when transitioning to the main game is performed, so when the fake notification image corresponding to the chance role is displayed, the player will again recognize that he has won the chance role in the game and will perform the operation to stop reel 4.

As described above, when a freeze game is executed in a specified game, a freeze effect is executed on the main display 8, and a fake notification (specific notification) that is different from the result of the lottery for the role in that game is executed.
Therefore, when a game involving a transition in the game state is executed, an unexpected effect is executed, such as the announced role changing, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, during freeze play, the game is prohibited from progressing, so it is not possible to cancel the effects, etc., and it is possible to take sufficient time to execute the effects.
Furthermore, a player performing a stop operation in the same way as in a normal game will become aware that a freeze game is being executed at that point when the stop operation is invalidated, making it possible to execute a novel and highly entertaining game that will give the player a certain degree of surprise.

Although the freeze effect is displayed on the main display 8, it may also be displayed on the sub-display 17.
In addition, during freeze play, when a fake notification is being made on the main display 8, an image of "Aim for the cherry!" may be displayed on the sub-display 17, thereby executing a presentation (standby presentation) to notify in advance that there is a possibility that the notification mode will change.
In this case, it is preferable to display an image similar to the above (fake display) on the sub-display 17 during part of a normal game that is not a freeze game, and in this way it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation even during a normal game.
As described above, the effect image during freeze game is displayed in the gaming machine of the third embodiment.

[Modification 1 of the third embodiment]
Next, a first modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In variant example 1 of this third embodiment, only a part of the freeze effects during freeze play differs from the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment described above, and the rest is the same as the slot machine 1 described above, so only the differences will be explained.

In the third embodiment described above, if a player operated a disabled stop button 5 during freeze play, the freeze effect (fake notification) would not change. However, in variant 1 of this third embodiment, the freeze effect (fake notification) is changed based on the operation of the stop button 5 during freeze play.

As described above, Figure 27 shows the freeze effect when a strong cherry role is won and a freeze game is executed, and shows the effect image on the main display 8 when the freeze time is determined to be 5 seconds and the fake notification type is determined to be the ``watermelon role.''
Therefore, if a fake notification mode other than the "watermelon role" is selected, a fake notification different from the one shown in the figure will be made.

First, as shown in Figure 27(a), when a game in which a freeze game is executed is started, as described above, the progress of the game is prohibited and the freeze effect is initiated. As a fake notification, a fake notification image 40a consisting of text information "Aim for the watermelon!" corresponding to the watermelon role is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8, and a role different from the winning role is notified.

Then, if the player operates the stop button 5 aiming for the watermelon role before a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the freeze game, the fake notification image 40a will be erased, and a conversion image 40c consisting of the text information "Convert!" will be displayed in its place in the main part of the screen of the main display 8, notifying in advance that the notification mode will be converted, as shown in Figure 27(b).
In other words, the main control unit 10 accepts input from the stop button 5, invalidates it for stopping the reel 4 but validates it for controlling the presentation, and transmits control information identifying that the input has been made to the sub-control unit 20, thereby displaying the converted image 40c.

By displaying this conversion image 40c, the player who operates the stop button 5 will realize that the current state is a frozen game, and will recognize that the fake notification image 40a that has been displayed until then will then be converted into an image announcing the winning role.
This converted image 40c continues to be displayed until the freeze game ends.

Then, when the freeze game ends and the main game begins, as shown in Figure 27(c), the conversion image 40c is erased, and a winning role notification image 40b consisting of text information "Aim for the Cherry!" corresponding to the strong cherry role is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8 to notify of a winning role.

On the other hand, when the fake notification image 40a is displayed and the player operates the stop button 5 after a predetermined time (e.g., 4 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the freeze game (start of the game), the conversion image 40c will not be displayed, and after the freeze time has elapsed, the image will be switched from the fake notification image 40a to the winning role notification image 40b (Figure 27 (a) → (c)).
From then on, the effects during the game will be carried out in the same manner as described above.

In other words, if the stop button 5 is operated within a predetermined time (e.g., 4 seconds) from the start of the freeze game (start of the game), the conversion image 40c will be displayed. However, if the stop button 5 is operated during the period (1 second) from the predetermined time (e.g., 4 seconds) until the freeze time (e.g., 5 seconds) is reached, the conversion image 40c will not be displayed.

This is to prevent the execution of such an effect that is difficult for the player to see, because if the stop button 5 is operated just before the end of a freeze game and the conversion image 40c is displayed, the conversion image 40c will be displayed for just an instant and then immediately switched to the winning combination notification image 40b.
Therefore, even if the stop button 5 is operated during the period (1 second) from when a predetermined time (e.g., 4 seconds) has elapsed until the freeze time (e.g., 5 seconds) is reached, the conversion image 40c will not be displayed, and the fake notification image 40a will remain displayed, and when the freeze time has elapsed thereafter, the winning role notification image 40b will automatically be switched to and displayed.

As described above, in variant example 1 of the third embodiment, when the player operates the stop button 5 during freeze play, the fake notification is terminated and a conversion image 40c is displayed to notify in advance that the notification mode will be changed.
That is, the sub-controller 20 as a specific notification control means makes it possible to terminate a specific notification (fake notification) based on the operation of the operation means (stop button 5).

Therefore, a player who is unaware that he is in freeze mode will realize that he is in freeze mode when he operates the stop button 5, making it possible to realize an unexpected game.
Furthermore, when the stop button 5 is operated, a conversion image 40c is displayed to notify in advance that the notification mode will be changed, making it possible to more clearly recognize that the image that had been displayed up until then was not the image that notified the actual winning combination, and making it possible for a player who feels something is wrong because the reel 4 has not stopped to reliably recognize that the state at that time is frozen game mode.

Furthermore, even if the player does not operate the stop button 5 during freeze play, the image will automatically switch to the winning combination notification image 40b when the freeze play ends. Therefore, even if the player does not operate the stop button 5, it is possible to end the fake notification and notify the winning combination without any problems.

Furthermore, if the player operates the stop button 5 after a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the freeze game (start of the game), the conversion image 40c will not be displayed, and the fake notification image 40a will remain displayed.In other words, the sub-control device 20, which serves as a specific notification control means, can prohibit the end of the specific notification (fake notification) if the operation means (stop button 5) is operated when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the game.

This prevents the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to see, such as when the stop button 5 is operated just before the end of a freeze game, causing the conversion image 40c to be displayed for just a moment and then immediately switched to the winning combination notification image 40b.

Although not shown in the figures, when the notification mode is changed during freeze play (when "Watermelon role → Chance role" in Figure 25 is selected), the image notifying the watermelon role is changed to an image notifying the chance role when the player first operates the stop button 5 during freeze play, and the image notifying the chance role is changed to the conversion image 40c when the player next operates the stop button 5.
As described above, the slot machine 1 according to the first modified example of the third embodiment is realized.

[Modification 2 of the Third Embodiment]
Next, a second modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In variant example 2 of this third embodiment, only a part of the freeze effects during freeze play differs from the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment described above, and the rest is the same as the slot machine 1 described above, so only the differences will be explained.

In the third embodiment described above, the notification mode was automatically switched during the freeze effect during freeze play, but in variant 2 of this third embodiment, the notification mode is switched based on the player's operation by executing a button effect during the freeze effect.

The button presentation as an operation presentation is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, and first, an operation image consisting of an image imitating an operation button that prompts the operation of the presentation button 2d (or upper presentation button 2f) as a presentation operation means, or text information instructing the operation (e.g., "PUSH"), is displayed on the main display 8 (or sub-display 17), and then, when the instructed presentation button 2d (or upper presentation button 2f) is operated, a predetermined image is displayed on the main display 8 (or sub-display 17).
In other words, the various effect images during the freeze effect are not displayed in response to the passage of time, but rather in response to an operation by the player.

As described above, Figure 28 shows the freeze effect when a strong cherry role is won and a freeze game is executed, and shows the effect image on the main display 8 when the freeze time is determined to be 5 seconds and the fake notification type is determined to be the ``watermelon role.''
Therefore, if a fake notification mode other than the "watermelon role" is selected, a fake notification different from the one shown in the figure will be made.

First, as shown in Figure 28 (a), when a game in which freeze play is executed is started, the progress of the game is prohibited and an operation image 40d imitating the effect button 2d, including the text information "PUSH" instructing the operation, is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8, and the button effect is executed.
The display of this operation image 40d activates the effect button 2d (the internal LED lights up in a color indicating an activated state), and prompts the player to operate the effect button 2d.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 2d, as shown in Figure 28(b), the operation image 40d is erased, and instead a fake notification image 40a consisting of text information "Aim for the watermelon!" corresponding to the watermelon role is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8 as a fake notification, and a role different from the winning role is announced.

Then, when the freeze time in the freeze game has elapsed, as shown in Figure 27(c), the fake notification image 40a is erased, and the operation image 40d is displayed again in the main part of the screen of the main display 8, and a second button effect is executed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 2d again, as shown in Figure 28 (d), the conversion image 40c is erased and a winning role notification image 40b consisting of text information ``Aim for the cherry!'' corresponding to the strong cherry role is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8 to notify of a winning role.
From then on, the effects during the game will be carried out in the same manner as described above.

If the player does not operate the effect button 2d when the first button effect is executed, the fake notification image 40a and winning role notification image 40b will not be displayed until the end of the game. If the effect button 2d is operated when the first button effect is executed and the player does not operate the effect button 2d when the second button effect is executed, the fake notification image 40a will remain displayed and the winning role notification image 40b will not be displayed until the end of the game.

As described above, in variant example 2 of the third embodiment, a button effect is executed during freeze play, and the fake notification image 40a is displayed when the player operates the effect button 2d.
In other words, the sub-controller 20 as a specific notification control means makes it possible to start a specific notification (fake notification) based on the operation of a performance operation means (for example, performance button 2d).
Therefore, the fake notification is executed by the player's own operation, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the freeze effect.

Furthermore, the button effect is executed twice during freeze play, and when the player operates the effect button 2d the second time, the winning combination notification image 40b is displayed.
Therefore, the player has the opportunity to operate the effect button 2d multiple times, and various effect images change depending on the player's own operation, making it possible to further increase the interest of the freeze effect.

Although not shown in the figures, when the notification mode is changed during freeze play (when "Watermelon role → Chance role" in Figure 25 is selected), a button effect is executed at the start of freeze play, and when the player first operates the effect button 2d, an image notifying the watermelon role is displayed, and then, after a predetermined time (5 seconds) has passed, a second button effect is executed, and when the player operates the effect button 2d for the second time, an image notifying the chance role is displayed, and after another predetermined time (5 seconds) has passed, a third button effect is executed, and when the player operates the effect button 2d for the third time, the winning role notification image 40b is displayed.
Also, during the freeze effect, a button effect may be executed that targets the operation of the upper effect button 2f.
As described above, the slot machine 1 according to the second modification of the third embodiment is realized.

[Modification 3 of the Third Embodiment]
Next, a third modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
In variant 3 of this third embodiment, the control of the reels during freeze play differs from that of the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment described above, but otherwise is the same as the slot machine 1 described above, so only the differences will be explained.

In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment described above, when a freeze game was executed, even if the stop button 5 was operated, the reels 4 did not stop but continued to rotate. However, in variant 3 of the third embodiment, it is possible to execute a pseudo game in which the reels 4 can be pseudo-stopped during a freeze game.

A pseudo game refers to an execution mode during a game in which multiple game results (pseudo game results) are derived in a single game, and the main control device 10 is capable of executing a pseudo game in a specified game.
Specifically, in a normal game, the main control device 10 rotates the reels 4 by operating the start lever 3, and stops the rotating reels 4 by operating the stop button 5, thereby deriving the result of one game. However, in a game in which a pseudo game is executed, the main control device 10 pseudo-stops the reels 4 before the final game result is derived, just like in a normal game, thereby deriving a pseudo game result (pseudo game result) even in the middle of the game.
In other words, when a simulated game is executed, multiple game results (including simulated game results) are derived by consuming the medals (bet input) required to execute one game.

The pseudo games are classified into operational pseudo games that require player operation and notification pseudo games that do not require player operation.
As mentioned above, the notification pseudo game is a pseudo game that is executed, for example, during the first game of the pseudo bonus state, in which reel 4 automatically comes to a pseudo-stop, and is a pseudo game that notifies the start of the pseudo bonus state, etc.

On the other hand, the simulated game is executed by first operating the start lever 3 to spin the reels 4, and then operating the stop button 5 during the game to pseudo-stop (temporarily stop) the spinning reels 4 and derive a simulated game result. After the pseudo game result has been determined, operating the start lever 3 again to spin the reels 4 again, and the actual game is executed in the same way as a regular game.

In addition, in the simulated operation game, it is possible to derive multiple simulated game results by causing the reel 4 to stop simulatedly for each of multiple operations by the player during the game.
After the pseudo-play operation is completed, the player operates the final stop button 5 to stop the spinning reel 4 (full stop) in the same way as in a normal game, and the final game result is derived.

Therefore, one game is defined as the period from the initial operation of the start lever 3 to the actual stop of the reel 4, and by performing pseudo-stops of the reel 4 during that time, multiple game results can be derived in one game (setting the number of bets for one game).
However, even if a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination stops as a result of the pseudo-play operation (a pseudo-winning combination), medals will not be paid out as in a normal game.

In variant 3 of the third embodiment, a pseudo-operation game can be executed during freeze play, and the reels 4 can be pseudo-stopped once or twice based on the player's operation of the stop button 5 during freeze play.

That is, the main control device 10 as a game control means comprises a first game control means capable of executing a first game (main game) in which a symbol combination formed by a plurality of reels (reels 4a to 4c) is derived based on the end of the game, and a second game control means capable of executing a second game (pseudo-operation game) in which, during freeze play, a symbol combination formed by a plurality of reels is derived in addition to the symbol combination derived in the first game.
Therefore, while the progress of the game is prohibited during freeze play, input of the stop button 5 to pseudo-stop the reel 4 is valid, and while the progress of the game is prohibited, a pseudo-operation game is executed involving pseudo-stopping of the reel 4 by operating the stop button 5.

Furthermore, in variant example 3 of the third embodiment, when the execution of a freeze game is decided in the main control device 10, the number of times the pseudo-operation game is to be executed and the freeze time during the freeze game are determined.
Specifically, when a strong cherry role is won and a freeze game is to be executed, if the pseudo bonus state is won, there is a 40% chance that the pseudo operation game will be executed once and the freeze time will be set to 10 seconds, and there is a 60% chance that the pseudo operation game will be executed twice and the freeze time will be set to 20 seconds; and when a strong cherry role is won and a freeze game is to be executed, if the pseudo bonus state is not won, there is a 60% chance that the pseudo operation game will be executed once and the freeze time will be set to 10 seconds, and there is a 40% chance that the pseudo operation game will be executed twice and the freeze time will be set to 20 seconds.
Therefore, the more times the pseudo game operation is performed, the higher the probability of winning the pseudo bonus state.

Furthermore, in the third modification of the third embodiment, unlike the third embodiment described above, the main control device 10 executes selection control of the notification mode in the fake notification.
The main control unit 10 then transmits control information specifying the results of the selection control of the notification mode in the fake notification to the sub-control unit 20, thereby executing the fake notification on the main display 8.

In addition, when the main control device 10 decides to execute the pseudo-operation game once, it will determine either the "watermelon role" or the "chance role" as the notification mode for the fake notification.
At this time, if the pseudo bonus state is won, it is preferable to increase the probability of selecting the "chance role" compared to when the pseudo bonus state is not won.
Furthermore, as will be described in more detail later, if it is decided to perform the pseudo-operation game twice, one of the following will be determined: "Watermelon role → Watermelon role,""Watermelon role → Chance role,""Chance role → Watermelon role," or "Chance role → Chance role."

Then, the main control device 10 performs stop control of the reels 4 in accordance with the determined notification mode of the fake notification, so as to be able to derive a pseudo stop result in the pseudo operation game.
For example, as shown in the figure, when the "watermelon role" is determined as the fake notification, stop control is performed that can pseudo-stop the pattern combination corresponding to the watermelon role based on the operation of the stop button 5 by the player during the pseudo-play.
The symbol combination at this time may be either a weak watermelon role or a strong watermelon role, and the combination may be selectively determined based on whether a pseudo bonus state is won.

First, various state transitions when a pseudo operation is executed once during freeze play in a predetermined game will be described with reference to FIG.
Figure 29 shows the state of accepting input from the stop button 5, the rotation state of the reel 4, and the transition of the presentation content on the main display 8 when a pseudo-operation game is executed once during freeze play in a specified game.
In addition, in the third modified example of the third embodiment, as described above, freeze play is executed in some games when a rare combination is won.
Also, FIG. 29 shows a case where a strong cherry role is won and a freeze game is executed, and the type of fake notification is determined to be a "watermelon role."

As shown in FIG. 29, when the game is started (timing t13) by the player operating the start lever 3 (start operation), the reels 4 start to rotate (forward rotation).
At this time, if a strong cherry role is won and a freeze game is decided to be executed, a freeze game will be executed in which the progress of the game is prohibited from the start of the game until the freeze time has elapsed.

In the third modified example of the third embodiment, a pseudo game operation as a second game is executed during this freeze game, and the reel 4 can be pseudo-stopped.
However, although the operation of the stop button 5 is effective for pseudo-stopping the reel 4, it is ineffective for actually stopping the reel 4, and the progress of the game remains prohibited.

Furthermore, when a freeze game is executed, as described above, a freeze effect will be executed on the main display 8 during the freeze game to notify a role other than the strong cherry role (fake notification), and a watermelon role will be notified.

Therefore, as shown in the figure, during pseudo-operation play (freeze play), a watermelon role is announced as a fake announcement, and when the player confirms the announcement and performs an operation aimed at the pattern corresponding to the watermelon role (timing t14), the pattern combination corresponding to the watermelon role (weak watermelon role or strong watermelon role) is pseudo-stopped.
In addition, the fake watermelon role notification ends with the pseudo-stop of reel 4.

It should be noted that even during pseudo-operation play, normal reel 4 pull-in stop control is performed, and if the stop operation is not performed at the appropriate timing, a predetermined missed symbol combination will be pseudo-stopped. However, during pseudo-operation play, the pull-in stop control may be ignored and a symbol combination corresponding to a watermelon role (weak watermelon role or strong watermelon role) may always be pseudo-stopped.
Furthermore, the pseudo-stopped reels 4 may be moved up and down at a predetermined interval within a range in which the pseudo-stopped symbols do not cross the pay line.
Furthermore, if the player does not operate the stop button 5 during the pseudo-operation game, the freeze game will end and the game will transition to the main game without pseudo-stopping of the reel 4.

Then, after the reel 4 has come to a pseudo-stop, when the player operates the start lever 3 (timing t15), the reel 4 starts to rotate again and the main game as the first game begins.
However, even if the rotation of the reel 4 is resumed by operating the start lever 3, the stop button 5 is not activated until the freeze game ends, and once the freeze time in the freeze game has elapsed, the operation of the stop button 5 is activated and the game begins.
In addition, the stop button 5 may be activated when the rotation of the reels 4 is resumed by operating the start lever 3.

Then, based on the player's operation of the stop button 5 during this game, the reels 4 stop (main stop) (timing t16), and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination stops.

The freeze game is controlled by time management so that it ends when the freeze time has elapsed, but the freeze game may not end until the player operates the stop button 5 during the pseudo-operation game to pseudo-stop each reel 4.
Therefore, in this case, the freeze game ends and the game shifts to the main game based on the pseudo game result being derived by operating the stop button 5 during the pseudo game.

Next, various state transitions when a pseudo operation is executed twice during freeze play in a predetermined game will be described with reference to FIG.
Figure 30 shows the state of accepting input from the stop button 5, the rotation state of the reel 4, and the transition of the presentation content on the main display 8 when a pseudo-operation game is executed twice during freeze play in a specified game.

Also, Figure 30 shows a case where a strong cherry role is won and a freeze game is executed, and the fake notification mode is determined to be "watermelon role -> chance role."
In other words, the main control device 10 decides to execute the pseudo operation game twice, and the notification pattern for the fake notification is that the fake notification for the first pseudo operation game is a "watermelon role," and the fake notification for the second pseudo operation game is a "chance role."

As shown in FIG. 30, when the game is started (timing t17) by the player operating the start lever 3 (start operation), the reels 4 start to rotate (forward rotation).
At this time, if a strong cherry role is won and a freeze game is decided to be executed, a freeze game will be executed in which the progress of the game is prohibited from the start of the game until the freeze time has elapsed.

In the third modified example of the third embodiment, the first pseudo operation game is executed as the second game during this freeze game, and the reel 4 can be pseudo-stopped.
However, although the operation of the stop button 5 is effective for pseudo-stopping the reel 4, it is ineffective for actually stopping the reel 4, and the progress of the game remains prohibited.

Furthermore, when the fake notification is determined to be "watermelon role → chance role", stop control is performed that can pseudo-stop the symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon role based on the operation of the stop button 5 by the player during the first pseudo-play.
Furthermore, when the first pseudo-operation game is executed, a freeze effect is executed on the main display 8 to notify (fake notify) a role different from the strong cherry role, and the watermelon role is notified.

Therefore, during the first pseudo-operation game (freeze game), a watermelon role is announced as a fake announcement, and when the player confirms the announcement and performs an operation aimed at the symbol corresponding to the watermelon role (timing t18), the symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon role (weak watermelon role or strong watermelon role) is pseudo-stopped.
In addition, the fake watermelon role notification ends with the pseudo-stop of reel 4.

Then, after the first pseudo-stop of the reel 4, when the player operates the start lever 3 (timing t19), the rotation of the reel 4 starts again, and the second pseudo-play operation as the second game is executed.
The timing at which the reels 4 start to rotate may be when the start lever 3 is operated, or when the start lever 3 is operated and a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the game.

Then, when a "chance role" is determined as a fake notification in the second pseudo-operation game, stop control is performed that can pseudo-stop a pattern combination corresponding to the chance role based on the player's operation of the stop button 5.
Furthermore, when the second pseudo-operation game is executed, a freeze effect is executed on the main display 8 to notify (fake notify) a role different from the strong cherry role, and a chance role is notified.

Therefore, during the second pseudo-operation game (freeze game), a notification of a chance role is made as a fake notification, and when the player confirms the notification and performs an operation aimed at the pattern corresponding to the chance role (timing t20), the pattern combination corresponding to the chance role is pseudo-stopped.
In addition, the fake notification of the chance role ends with the pseudo-stop of reel 4.

Then, after the second pseudo-stop of reel 4, when the player operates start lever 3 (timing t21), rotation of reel 4 begins again and the first game is started.
However, even if the rotation of the reel 4 is resumed by operating the start lever 3, the stop button 5 will not be activated until the freeze game ends, and once the freeze time in the freeze game has elapsed, the operation of the stop button 5 will be activated and the game will begin.
In addition, the stop button 5 may be activated when the rotation of the reels 4 is resumed by operating the start lever 3.

Then, based on the operation of the stop button 5 by the player during the game, the reels 4 stop (main stop) (timing t22), and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination stops.
In addition, an effective operation time is set in advance for the first pseudo operation game, and if the player does not operate the stop button 5 during the effective operation time of the first pseudo operation game, the game will automatically shift to the second pseudo operation game (the fake notification will also change). Also, if the player does not operate the stop button 5 during the second pseudo operation game, the game will automatically shift to the main game upon the end of the freeze game (the fake notification will also end).

As described above, in variant example 3 of the third embodiment, a pseudo-operation game is executed during freeze play, and the stopping control of reel 4 is performed so that the pattern combination corresponding to the role that has been falsely notified during freeze play can be pseudo-stopped.
That is, the main control device 10 as the second game control means is capable of deriving a symbol combination corresponding to a specific notification (fake notification) onto the reels 4 .

Therefore, not only is a role different from the winning role announced, but a symbol combination corresponding to the fake announcement is also derived on reel 4, which increases the player's sense of expectation and makes the game more entertaining.
Furthermore, since the reel 4 is pseudo-stopped by the player's own operation, it becomes possible to execute a more realistic game during freeze play, which can further increase the player's sense of anticipation.

Furthermore, if a plurality of pseudo operation games are executed during a freeze game, a plurality of pseudo operation games will be executed in one game.
That is, the main control device 10 as the second game control means makes it possible to execute the second game (pseudo-operation game) multiple times in one game.
Therefore, a player can enjoy multiple games in one game, which can greatly increase the player's sense of expectation and the interest of the game.

In addition, the pseudo-operation game may be executed three or more times during the freeze game.
Furthermore, the freeze game is controlled by time management so that it ends when the freeze time has elapsed, but the freeze game may not end until the player operates the stop button 5 during the pseudo operation game to pseudo-stop each reel 4 twice.
Therefore, in this case, the freeze game ends and the game shifts to the main game based on the fact that two pseudo game results are derived by operating the stop button 5 during the pseudo game.

Next, referring to Figure 31, the probability of selecting the notification mode of the fake notification in each pseudo operation game when the pseudo operation game is executed twice during freeze game will be explained.
In variant example 3 of the third embodiment, as described above, if it is decided to execute the pseudo-operation game twice during freeze play, the notification mode in the fake notification will be determined by the control of the main control unit 10 to be one of "watermelon role → watermelon role,""watermelon role → chance role,""chance role → watermelon role," or "chance role → chance role."

For example, if "watermelon role → chance role" is determined, in the first pseudo-operation game, a fake notification of the watermelon role is executed on the main display 8, and stop control is performed to pseudo-stop the pattern combination corresponding to the watermelon role (weak watermelon role or strong watermelon role) on the reel 4, and in the second pseudo-operation game, a fake notification of the chance role is executed on the main display 8, and stop control is performed to pseudo-stop the pattern combination corresponding to the chance role on the reel 4.
In addition, "Watermelon role → Watermelon role" and "Chance role → Chance role" indicate that a fake notification and pseudo stop control of reel 4 are performed for the same role in the first and second pseudo-operation games.

FIG. 31 shows the probability of selecting the notification mode in each freeze game when it is decided to execute the pseudo operation game twice during the freeze game based on winning the strong cherry role.
In addition, in variant example 3 of the third embodiment, the notification mode for each freeze game is determined by the main control unit 10, and the main control unit 10 selects the notification mode by drawing a predetermined random number when the freeze game is determined.

As shown in Figure 31, if the pseudo bonus state is not won, a lottery is held to select the notification mode in which "watermelon role → watermelon role" is determined with a 70% probability, "watermelon role → chance role" is determined with a 20% probability, "chance role → watermelon role" is determined with a 10% probability, and "chance role → chance role" is determined with a 0% probability.
Furthermore, if the pseudo bonus state is won, a lottery is held to select the notification mode such that "watermelon role → watermelon role" is determined with a 40% probability, "watermelon role → chance role" is determined with a 30% probability, "chance role → watermelon role" is determined with a 20% probability, and "chance role → chance role" is determined with a 10% probability.
The freeze effect in each pseudo-operation game will be executed according to the notification mode determined by the above-mentioned selection lottery.

As described above, in variant example 3 of the third embodiment, when the pseudo operation game is executed twice during freeze play, the notification modes for the fake notification in each pseudo operation game are "watermelon role → watermelon role,""watermelon role → chance role,""chance role → watermelon role," and "chance role → chance role," and the notification mode is selected based on the result of the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state.
Therefore, the target roles for pseudo-stops change in various ways, making it possible to carry out more diverse and interesting freeze games.

In addition, the notification mode of the fake notification in each operation pseudo game will change depending on whether or not the pseudo bonus state is won, so it is possible to change the player's expectations by the fake notification and the pseudo-stopping pattern combination.
In particular, "Chance Role → Chance Role" is not selected when the pseudo-bonus state is not won, so when this pattern is selected, the pseudo-bonus state will always be entered, which can greatly increase the player's sense of expectation.

Note that the probability of selecting each pattern may be other than those mentioned above, and the target roles for fake notifications may be other than those mentioned above.

The above describes the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, but freeze play may also be performed during the pseudo-bonus state and the AT state in addition to the normal game state. During the pseudo-bonus state, freeze play may be performed depending on whether or not a lottery to transition to the AT state has been drawn, and during the AT state, freeze play may be performed depending on whether or not an additional lottery has been drawn.

Furthermore, the number of times that the pseudo operation game is executed during the freeze game may be three or more times.
Also, freeze play may be prohibited during the ending period before the limiter is reached.
In addition, when the notification mode during the freeze game (the symbol combination that is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo operation game) matches the notification mode during the main game, the winning of the pseudo bonus state may be confirmed. In other words, it may be possible to enjoy whether the patterns of both games match.
In addition, when a pseudo bonus state is won, a special symbol combination (such as seven symbols) may be pseudo-stopped by pseudo game operation.
Furthermore, although a pseudo operation game is executed during freeze play, a pseudo notification game in which the reel 4 stops without any operation by the player may also be executed.
The slot machine 1 of the third embodiment is configured as described above.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a fourth embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

In the fourth embodiment of the gaming machine (slot machine 1), only some of the control and presentation content related to the CZ state differs from that of the first embodiment of the gaming machine described above, and the rest is the same as that of the first embodiment.
Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, only the points that are different from the first embodiment will be described, and the other points are the same as the first embodiment described above, so the description will be omitted.

[CZ state in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment]
First, with reference to Figures 32 and 33, the CZ state in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be explained.
In the slot machine 1 of this fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the main control unit 10 performs a lottery process to transition to the CZ state based on the winning of a predetermined rare role (e.g., a strong cherry role) in the normal game state, and transitions the game state to the CZ state with a predetermined probability (e.g., 10%).

When the gaming state transitions to the CZ state, the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state will be executed in a more advantageous manner for the player than during the normal gaming state.
In other words, the main control unit 10 is equipped with a specific game state control means that can control the game state to a specific game state (CZ state) in which the probability of a special right (right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state) being granted by the special game state right granting means (main control unit 10) is increased based on the establishment of predetermined conditions.
In addition, various effects are executed as described above before the transition to the CZ state.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the main control device 10 provides a special replay role as a role to be selected by lottery in the game.
In other words, the main control unit 10, which serves as a lottery means capable of executing lotteries related to the granting of benefits such as lotteries for roles and lotteries for transitioning to a pseudo-bonus state (or CZ state or AT state), also executes lotteries for special replay roles based on the execution of the game.
The special replay role is a role that is set as a type of replay role, similar to the chance role, and if the role is won, the player is granted the right to play a replay.

Furthermore, in a game in which a special replay role is won, if the right reel 4c is stopped first (if reel 4 is stopped by a special operation such as reverse pressing or irregular pressing), the "7 7 7" symbol combination (special symbol combination) will stop on the active line, and if any other reel 4 is stopped first, reel 4 stopping control is performed so that the "replay replay replay" symbol combination will stop on the active line, just as when a normal replay role is won.

In other words, the main control unit 10 is equipped with a game result derivation means that, when a special operation (reverse push) is performed by a player in a game in which the result of the role lottery is the first lottery result (winning a special replay role), it is possible to derive a special result (a pattern combination of "7, 7, 7" (special pattern combination)) as the result of the game.
Therefore, if the game is played so that the left reel 4a is stopped first, the player will not notice that a special replay combination has been achieved.
It is preferable to set the probability of winning the special replay role to a relatively low probability (for example, 10%).

In addition, in this fourth embodiment, the stopping control of reel 4 when a normal replay role other than a special replay role or a chance role is won also differs from the first embodiment described above. When the right reel 4c is stopped first (when a special operation is performed), the "replay 7 7" symbol combination stops on an active line, and when any other reel 4 is stopped first, the stopping control of reel 4 is performed so that the "replay replay replay" symbol combination stops on an active line.

In the fourth embodiment, during a game in the CZ state, a lottery is held to transition to the pseudo-bonus state, mainly when a rare role or a special replay role is won.
In other words, the main control device 10 as a lottery means is equipped with a special game state right granting means that can grant a special right (right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state) to generate a pseudo-bonus state as a special game state based on winning a rare role or a special replay role.

First, referring to Figure 32, we will explain the transition of the game state when the CZ state occurs.
Figure 32 shows a case where a player wins a special replay role and a rare role in a game during the CZ state, but does not win the lottery to transition to the pseudo-bonus state.

As shown in Figure 32, when the game state transitions from the normal game state to the CZ state (timing t30), in the game during the CZ state, a lottery is held to transition to a pseudo-bonus state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.
Then, if a special replay role is won during a game in the CZ state (timing t31), a lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state will be held.
FIG. 32 shows a case where the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is not won, and therefore the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state (special right) is not granted.

Furthermore, if a rare role is won during a game in the CZ state (timing t32), a lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state will be held. However, as mentioned above, Figure 32 shows a case where the lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state is not won, so in this case too, the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state (special right) will not be granted.

Then, when the number of games played during the CZ state reaches a specified number of games (for example, 10 games) (timing t33), a lottery regarding the end of the CZ state will be held in the subsequent game.

In this fourth embodiment, the CZ state continues unconditionally (except in the case of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus state) until a specified number of games (for example, 10) have been played, and if the right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state is not granted in the game after the specified number of games have been played, the state ends when a normal replay role is won.
Therefore, in games that exceed the specified number, the CZ state will continue unless a normal replay role is won, and during that time a lottery will be held to transition to a highly advantageous pseudo-bonus state.

In addition, as will be explained in more detail below, if the right to transition to pseudo-bonus state is granted when a rare symbol is won, a specified premonition period is set, so if the number of games played exceeds the specified number during the premonition period in which the right to transition to pseudo-bonus state is granted, the CZ state will not end even if a regular replay symbol is won.

As shown in the figure, if a normal replay role is won in a game that exceeds the specified number of games (timing t34), the condition for ending the CZ state is met, and the game state will transition to the normal game state from the next game.
The specified number of games may be 20 games, 30 games, or the like.
In addition, push order navigation may be performed when the push order bell role is won during the CZ state, or when the push order bell role is won, push order navigation may be performed with a lower probability (for example, 60%) than during the pseudo bonus state or AT state.

Next, referring to Figure 33, we will explain the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state in the main control device 10 during the CZ state.
Figure 33 shows the probability of winning the pseudo bonus state when the transition lottery trigger role to the pseudo bonus state is won under the control of the main control unit 10 during the CZ state.
In addition, the main control device 10 draws a predetermined random number when each transition lottery trigger role is won, thereby conducting a lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state.

As shown in Figure 33, if a special replay role is won in a game during the CZ state, a lottery is held to transition to a pseudo-bonus state so that there is an 80% chance of not winning and a 20% chance of winning.
In addition, if a rare role (strong/weak watermelon role, strong/weak cherry role, chance role) is won in a game during the CZ state, a lottery is held to transition to a pseudo-bonus state with a 60% probability of not winning and a 40% probability of winning.

If a player wins a special replay role during the CZ state and also wins the lottery to transition to the pseudo-bonus state, the game state will transition to the pseudo-bonus state from the game following that game.
On the other hand, as will be described in more detail later, if a player wins a rare role during the CZ state and also wins the lottery to transition to the pseudo-bonus state, a premonition period will be set until the player wins a special replay role, and the game state will transition to the pseudo-bonus state from the next game after the player wins the special replay role during this premonition period.

Furthermore, in the main control device 10, when a transition to a pseudo bonus state occurs due to the winning of a special replay role, a pseudo bonus state is generated that continues for 30 games.
On the other hand, if a rare combination is won and the player transitions to a pseudo-bonus state, the player is selectively set to either a pseudo-bonus state lasting for 30 games or a pseudo-bonus state lasting for 50 games, as will be described in detail later.

In the fourth embodiment, if a role other than a special replay role or a rare role is won during a game in the CZ state, a lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state is not held. However, a lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state may also be held when a role other than a special replay role or a rare role is won. However, when a role other than a special replay role or a rare role is won, it is preferable to lower the probability of winning a transition to the pseudo bonus state compared to when a special replay role or a rare role is won.

In addition, the role that triggers the transition to the pseudo-bonus state in a game during the CZ state may be other than those mentioned above, but it is preferable that it includes a role that causes a special pattern combination to stop only when the player performs a reverse push operation.
In addition, the probability of winning the pseudo bonus state when winning the lottery trigger role for transitioning to each pseudo bonus state may be other than the above, as long as the probability of transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is higher during the CZ state than during the normal game state.
As described above, the CZ state is realized in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment.

[Control when a special replay role is won during the CZ state in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment]
Next, referring to Figures 34 to 36, we will explain the control by the main control unit 10 and the display control by the sub-control unit 20 in the gaming machine (slot machine 1) of this fourth embodiment when a special replay role is won during the CZ state and the game transitions to a pseudo-bonus state.

First, referring to Figure 34, we will explain the transition of the game state when a special replay role is won during the CZ state and the transition lottery to the pseudo-bonus state at that time, and the display content (presentation) on the main display 8.
As shown in Figure 34, when the game state transitions from the normal game state to the CZ state (timing t35), in the game during the CZ state, a lottery is held to transition to a pseudo-bonus state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

In addition, during normal game play, effects corresponding to the normal game play state are executed by the main display 8, sub-display 17, lamp 11, and speaker 9, but when the game play state transitions to the CZ state, effects corresponding to the CZ state are executed by the main display 8, sub-display 17, lamp 11, and speaker 9.

Then, if a special replay role is won during a game in the CZ state (timing t36), a lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state will be held.
FIG. 34 shows a case where the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is won, and in this case the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted.

In addition, if the player wins the lottery for transitioning to a pseudo-bonus state when a special replay role is won, an instruction display is displayed on the main display 8 or the like during the game, encouraging the player to stop reel 4 with a special operation (reverse push) and stop a special pattern combination.
As mentioned above, in a game in which a special replay role is won, if a special operation (reverse pressing) is performed to stop reel 4, a special symbol combination can be stopped, and if the pressing operation at this time is appropriate, the special symbol combination ("7 7 7") will stop.

Then, when the game following the game that won the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery starts (timing t37), the game state will transition from the CZ state to the pseudo-bonus state.
Therefore, in this case, the CZ state will end and the pseudo bonus state will begin before the number of games in the CZ state reaches the specified number of games (timing t38).
Furthermore, when the gaming state transitions to the pseudo bonus state, a presentation corresponding to the pseudo bonus state will be executed by the main display device 8, etc.

In addition, even if an improper button press operation is performed in a game in which a special replay role is won and the special symbol combination ("7 7 7") does not stop, the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted, so the pseudo bonus state will be transitioned to at the start of the game following the game in which the pseudo bonus state transition lottery was won (timing t37).

Next, referring to Figure 35, we will explain the presentation image on the main display 8 when a special replay role is won during the CZ state and the transition lottery to the pseudo bonus state is won at that time.
The various performance images on the main display 8 are displayed under the control of the sub-controller 20 based on control information from the main controller 10.

First, as shown in Figure 35 (a), when the game state transitions from the normal game state to the CZ state (timing t35 in Figure 34), during the CZ state, a CZ state image 50a is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8, allowing the player to recognize that they are in the CZ state.
The CZ state image 50a may be any image that allows the player to recognize that he is in the CZ state, and may be a still image or a moving image consisting of a predetermined character, background, etc.

In addition, a CZ state game number image 51 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the main display 8, which indicates the number of games remaining relative to the specified number of games during the CZ state.
The CZ state game number image 51 is an image containing numerical information, and is updated by subtraction in accordance with the progress of the game during the CZ state.
In addition, if the specified number of games is exceeded, it is preferable to change the CZ state game number image 51 to symbol information such as "?".

If a special replay role is won during a game in the CZ state, a lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state will be held, and if this lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state is won (timing t36 in Figure 34), the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state will be granted.

For example, as shown in Figure 35 (b), in a game in which the CZ state game number image 51 becomes "8G", if a special replay role is won and the transition lottery to the pseudo-bonus state is won, the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is granted and an instruction display will be executed during the execution of the game.
Then, below the CZ state image 50a on the screen of the main display 8, a pattern instruction image 52a consisting of text information "Aim for 7" that encourages the stopping of a special pattern combination ("7, 7, 7"), and an operation instruction image 52b that indicates the stopping order (stopping direction) of reel 4 are displayed side by side in the left-right direction as special operation information.
Therefore, during the execution of a game in which a special replay role has been won and the transition lottery to the pseudo bonus state has been won, the main display 8 displays an instruction prompting the player to stop the reel 4 by operating the stop button 5 with a special operation (reverse pressing) and stop the special pattern combination.

When the player stops reel 4 according to the above instructions, a special symbol combination in which 7 symbols 54a line up on the pay line of each reel 4 will stop, as shown in Figure 35 (c).
In addition, the pattern indication image 52a and operation indication image 52b displayed on the screen of the main display 8 are erased, and instead a bonus confirmation image 52c consisting of the text information "Bonus Confirmed" is displayed to notify that a pseudo-bonus state has occurred.

Then, although not shown in the figure, when the game following the game that won the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery starts (timing t37 in Figure 34), the pseudo-bonus state begins and the effects for the pseudo-bonus state are executed on the main display 8.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 35 (d), if a special replay role is won in a game during the CZ state but the transition lottery to the pseudo-bonus state at that time is not won, a push order navigation image 22 showing the push order other than the special operation (reverse push) will be displayed below the CZ state image 50a on the screen of the main display 8.
For example, as shown in the figure, a push order navigation image 22 consisting of numerical information "1, 3, 2" is displayed, prompting the left reel 4a to stop first, the right reel 4c to stop second, and the center reel 4b to stop third.

In addition, the push order navigation image 22 at this time may be any push order other than the special operation (reverse push).
Furthermore, since players often start the game by stopping the left reel 4a first, if the player does not win the lottery to transition to the pseudo-bonus state, the push order navigation image 22 may not be displayed (i.e., no instruction information may be provided).

As mentioned above, if the stop buttons 5 are pressed in a sequence other than the special operation (reverse pressing) when a special replay role is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay role will stop, and as shown in Figure 35(e), the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay role will stop, with the replay symbols 54b lined up on the active line on each reel 4.

If the conditions for terminating the CZ state are not met, the effects during the CZ state will continue to be executed with the start of the game following the game in which the special replay role was won, although this is not shown in the illustration.
In this case, even if the push order navigation image 22 is ignored and a special operation is performed in the game, resulting in the "7-7-7" symbol combination (special symbol combination) stopping, the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is not granted, so the pseudo-bonus state will not be entered.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of this fourth embodiment, in a game in which a special replay role is won during the CZ state, if the right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state is granted, a pattern instruction image 52a and an operation instruction image 52b are displayed on the main display 8, and an instruction display is executed to stop the pattern combination of "7-7-7" (special pattern combination).
In other words, the sub-controller 20 is equipped with a notification control means that can notify special operation information (pattern instruction image 52a, operation instruction image 52b) for deriving a special result (pattern combination of "7-7-7" (special pattern combination)) when a special right (right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state) is granted by the special game state right granting means (main controller 10) in a game in which the lottery result of the lottery means (main controller 10) is the first lottery result (winning a special replay role).

Therefore, if the stopping operation is performed in accordance with the displayed pattern instruction image 52a and operation instruction image 52b, a special pattern combination will stop when the pseudo bonus state begins, making it possible for the player to reliably recognize the start of the pseudo bonus state.
In addition, the special symbol combination is stopped by the player's stopping operation on reel 4, so a pseudo-bonus state occurs in the same progression as a so-called real bonus, making it possible to give the player even more enjoyment.

Furthermore, in a game in which a special replay role is won during the CZ state, if the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is not granted, a push order navigation image 22 is displayed so that the special symbol combination does not stop.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the special symbol combination from stopping even when the pseudo bonus state is not won, and it is possible to proceed with the game without any sense of incongruity when the pseudo bonus state is not won.

In addition, in a game where a special replay role is won during the CZ state, if the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is granted, the special symbol combination can be stopped by pressing the buttons in reverse as a special operation, but the special symbol combination can also be stopped by pressing the buttons in a different order.

Next, referring to Figure 36, we will explain the presentation image on the main display 8 when a normal replay role is won during the CZ state.
As mentioned above, in a game in which a special replay role is won during the CZ state, if the right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state is granted, an instruction display to stop the special pattern combination will be executed on the main display 8. However, in the slot machine 1 of this fourth embodiment, if a normal replay role is won in a game within a specified number of games during the CZ state, an instruction display similar to the above will be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%).

Therefore, in this case, even if the player stops reel 4 with the special operation as instructed, the special symbol combination will not stop, so the instruction display when a normal replay role is won will be a fake instruction display.
As mentioned above, in this fourth embodiment, if a special operation is performed in a game in which a normal replay role is won, the symbol combination "Replay 7 7" will stop on reel 4.

Figure 36 shows a presentation image on the main display 8 when a fake instruction presentation is executed with a predetermined probability when a normal replay role is won in a game during the CZ state.
When executing a fake instruction effect, when a normal replay role is won in a game during the CZ state, the main control unit 10 draws lots to determine whether or not to execute a fake instruction effect. If the result of this lottery is that a fake instruction effect will be executed, the main control unit 10 sends control information to the sub-control unit 20 instructing the execution of the fake instruction effect, and based on the reception of this control information, the sub-control unit 20 controls the main display 8 to execute the fake instruction effect.
When a normal replay role is won in a game during the CZ state, the main control unit 10 draws a predetermined random number to determine whether or not to execute a fake instruction effect, and executes the fake instruction effect with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%).

First, as shown in Figure 36(a), when a normal replay role is won in a specified game during the CZ state (for example, a game in which the CZ state game count image 51 is "8G") and it is decided that a fake instruction effect will be executed, just as when a special replay role is won, a pattern instruction image 52a consisting of text information "Aim for 7" encouraging the stopping of a special pattern combination ("7, 7, 7") and an operation instruction image 52b showing the stopping order (stop direction) of reel 4 are displayed side by side in the left-right direction below the CZ state image 50a on the screen of the main display 8 as special operation information.

When the player operates to stop reel 4 in accordance with the fake instruction effect, a symbol combination ("Replay 7 7") will stop on the active line, with the replay symbol 54b on the left reel 4a and the 7 symbol 54a on each of the center reel 4b and right reel 4c, as shown in Figure 36(b).
In other words, when the fake instruction effect is executed, even if the player performs the stop operation properly, the special symbol combination will not stop, and a symbol combination other than the special symbol combination will stop, and the player will be notified that the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state has not been granted.

However, since the 7 symbol 54a will stop on each of the center reel 4b and the right reel 4c, part of the special symbol combination will be formed until the special operation (reverse push) is completed, and the player will not be able to tell whether the special symbol combination will stop or not until the last left reel 4a stops.
Then, although not shown in the figure, when the game following the game in which the fake instruction effect was executed starts, the effect that was executed during the CZ state will continue to be executed on the main display 8.

In addition, if the number of games played during the CZ state exceeds the specified number of games, the sub-controller 20 will always execute a fake instruction performance when a normal replay role is won in that game.
As mentioned above, the CZ state ends when a normal replay role is won in a game that exceeds the specified number of games.

Therefore, in the final game when the CZ state ends, a fake instruction effect will always be executed, making it possible to keep the player's expectations high until the final game.
However, as will be described in more detail later, if the right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state has been granted by winning a rare role, the CZ state will continue even if a normal replay role is won in a game that exceeds the specified number of games.In this case, the CZ state will continue even if the fake instruction display is executed.
In addition, after the final game in which the CZ state ends is over, a presentation image announcing the end of the CZ state may be displayed on the main display 8.

As described above, when a normal replay role is won in a game during the CZ state, a fake instruction effect is executed with a predetermined probability, which makes it possible to increase the interest of playing during the CZ state.
In addition, since a fake instruction effect is executed when a normal replay role, which has a relatively high probability of winning, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of an instruction effect (or a fake instruction effect) that may grant the right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state during the CZ state, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

Furthermore, if the reel 4 is stopped according to the fake instructions, some of the special symbol combinations will stop as each reel 4 stops, making it possible to play a highly entertaining game that will hold the player's expectations until the game ends.

In addition, the probability of executing the fake instruction effect when a normal replay role is won in a game during the CZ state can be any.
In addition, the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the fake instruction performance may be performed by the sub-control device 20.
As described above, control is performed when a special replay role is won during the CZ state in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment.

[Control when a rare role is won during the CZ state in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment]
Next, referring to Figures 37 to 39, we will explain the control by the main control unit 10 and the display control (display content) by the sub-control unit 20 in the gaming machine (slot machine 1) of this fourth embodiment when a rare role is won during the CZ state, resulting in a transition to a pseudo-bonus state.

First, referring to Figure 37, we will explain the transition of the game state when a rare role is won during the CZ state and the transition lottery to the pseudo-bonus state at that time, and the display content (presentation) on the main display 8.
As shown in Figure 37, when the game state transitions from the normal game state to the CZ state (timing t39), in the game during the CZ state, a lottery is held to transition to a pseudo-bonus state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

In addition, during normal game play, effects corresponding to the normal game play are executed on the main display 8, etc., but when the game play state transitions to the CZ state, effects corresponding to the CZ state are executed on the main display 8, etc.

Then, if a rare role is won during a game in the CZ state (timing t40), a lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state will be held.
FIG. 37 shows a case where the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is won, and in this case the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted.

In this fourth embodiment, when a rare role is won and the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is granted, the pseudo-bonus state is not transitioned to from the next game, but is transitioned to the pseudo-bonus state after the premonition period (main premonition period) has elapsed.
This premonition period (timing t40 to t41) continues until the lottery result of the lottery means in the subsequent game results in a special replay winning combination.
Therefore, if a player wins a rare role and then wins a special replay role in a game that is executed after the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state has been granted, the game state will transition to the pseudo bonus state from the next game.

In addition, during the premonition period (main premonition period), a CZ premonition effect (main CZ premonition effect) is executed on the main display 8.
If a special replay role is won during the premonition period (main premonition period), an instruction display is displayed on the main display 8 or the like during the game, encouraging the player to stop reel 4 with a special operation (reverse push) and stop a special pattern combination.
Therefore, in a game in which this special replay role is won, if a special operation (reverse pressing) is performed to stop reel 4, the special symbol combination can be stopped, and if the pressing operation at this time is appropriate, the special symbol combination ("7 7 7") will stop.

Then, when the next game following the game in which the special replay role was won during the premonition period (main premonition period) starts (timing t42), the game state will transition from the CZ state to the pseudo-bonus state.
Therefore, in this case, the CZ state will end and the pseudo bonus state will begin before the number of games in the CZ state reaches the specified number of games (timing t43).
Furthermore, when the gaming state transitions to the pseudo bonus state, a presentation corresponding to the pseudo bonus state will be executed by the main display device 8, etc.

In addition, even if an improper button press operation is performed in a game in which the special replay role is won and the special symbol combination ("7-7-7") does not stop, the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted, so the pseudo bonus state will be transitioned to at the start of the game following the game in which the pseudo bonus state transition lottery was won (timing t42).

Also, although not shown in the figure, even if a rare role is won but the right to transition to a pseudo bonus state is not granted, a premonition period (fake premonition period) is set, and under the control of the sub-control device 20, a CZ premonition effect (CZ fake premonition effect) is executed on the main display 8, in which an effect image similar to that displayed when the right to transition to a pseudo bonus state is granted is displayed.
This fake premonition period will end if a special replay role or a regular replay role is won in the game during that period.
However, during the fake premonition period, even if you win a special replay role (a win that does not grant you the right to transition to a pseudo bonus state), no instruction will be displayed, and the fake premonition period will end when the pattern combination corresponding to the normal replay role stops.

In addition, even if the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is granted, there may be cases where the number of games exceeds the specified number of games (timing t43) without subsequently winning a special replay role. In this case, the premonition period (main premonition period) will continue, and if a special replay role is won in a subsequent game, the player will transition to the pseudo-bonus state.

In addition, there may be cases where the number of games exceeds the specified number of games during the fake premonition period without winning either the special replay role or the normal replay role. In this case, for example, if a normal replay role is won in a subsequent game (timing t44), the fake premonition period will end and the CZ state itself will also end.

In addition, if the right to transition to pseudo bonus state is granted by winning a special replay role in a game during the fake premonition period, a command will be executed in that game and the game will transition to pseudo bonus state from the next game onwards.If the right to transition to pseudo bonus state is granted by winning a rare role in a game during the fake premonition period, the fake premonition period will change to the main premonition period.

Next, referring to Figure 38, we will explain the presentation image on the main display 8 when a rare role is won during the CZ state and the transition lottery to the pseudo bonus state at that time is won.
The various performance images on the main display 8 are displayed under the control of the sub-controller 20 based on control information from the main controller 10.

First, as shown in Figure 38 (a), when the game state transitions from the normal game state to the CZ state (timing t39 in Figure 37), during the CZ state, a CZ state image 50a is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8, allowing the player to recognize that they are in the CZ state.
In addition, a CZ state game number image 51 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the main display 8, which indicates the number of games remaining in the CZ state.

As shown in the figure, if a rare role, such as a strong watermelon role, is won during a game in the CZ state, watermelon symbols 54c will stop in a line on reel 4 sloping downward to the right.
In addition, if a rare role is won, a lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state will be held, and if this lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state is won (timing t40 in Figure 37), the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state will be granted.

When a rare role is won, a CZ premonition effect (CZ main premonition effect) is executed according to the setting of the premonition period (main premonition period), and as shown in Figure 38 (b), the CZ state image 50a on the main display 8 is changed to a premonition CZ state image 50b indicating the premonition period.
Furthermore, the premonition CZ state image 50b displayed during the CZ premonition performance can be any image as long as the player can recognize that it is different from the CZ state image 50a by changing the background color, etc., but it is preferable to display an image that increases the player's sense of anticipation.

As shown in Figure 38 (c), if a special replay role is won (timing t41 in Figure 37) in a game during the premonition period (main premonition period) (for example, a game in which the CZ state game number image 51 becomes "5G"), the player will be granted the right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state, and an instruction display will be executed during the game.
By executing this instruction effect, a pattern instruction image 52a consisting of text information "Aim for 7" encouraging the stopping of a special pattern combination ("7, 7, 7") and an operation instruction image 52b showing the stopping order (stopping direction) of reel 4 are displayed side by side in the left-right direction below the premonition CZ state image 50b on the screen of the main display 8 as special operation information.

Therefore, during the premonition period (main premonition period), while a game in which a special replay role has been won is being played, the main display 8 will display an instruction prompting the player to stop the reels 4 by operating the stop button 5 with a special operation (reverse pressing) and stop the special symbol combination.

When the player stops reel 4 according to the instructions, a special symbol combination in which 7 symbols 54a line up on the pay line of each reel 4 will stop, as shown in Figure 38 (d).
In addition, the pattern indication image 52a and operation indication image 52b displayed on the screen of the main display 8 are erased, and instead a bonus confirmation image 52c consisting of the text information "Bonus Confirmed" is displayed to notify that a pseudo-bonus state has occurred.

Although not shown in the figure, when the game following the game that won the lottery to transition to the pseudo-bonus state starts (timing t42 in Figure 37), the pseudo-bonus state begins and the effects during the pseudo-bonus state are executed on the main display 8.
In addition, the premonition period (main premonition period) will continue until a special replay role is won, so even if the CZ state exceeds the specified number of games, the CZ premonition effect (main CZ premonition effect) will continue to be executed.

In addition, in some games (including games that exceed the specified number of games) during the premonition period (main premonition period) when a normal replay role is won, an instruction display (fake instruction display) will be executed on the main display 8.
In other words, the sub-controller 20 executes a fake instruction display on the main display 8 with a predetermined probability (for example, 60%) when a normal replay role is won in a game (including games that exceed the specified number of games) during the premonition period (main premonition period).
However, in this case, even if reel 4 stops according to the instructions, the special pattern combination does not stop, so there is no transition to the pseudo-bonus state, and the premonition period (main premonition period) continues thereafter.

That is, in the game during the premonition period (main premonition period), even if a normal replay role is won, the same instruction performance as when a special replay role is won is executed.
In addition, if a normal replay role is won in a game during the premonition period (main premonition period), the instruction effect may be executed without fail (with a 100% probability).
In addition, if the number of games played during the premonition period (main premonition period) exceeds a specified number of games, the instruction effect may not be executed if a normal replay role is won.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 38 (e), even if a player wins a rare role in a game during the CZ state but does not win the lottery to transition to the pseudo-bonus state at that time, a CZ premonition effect (CZ fake premonition effect) is executed based on the setting of the premonition period (fake premonition period), and, as described above, the CZ state image 50a on the main display 8 is changed to a premonition CZ state image 50b indicating the premonition period.

As shown in Figure 38 (f), if a special replay role is won in a game during the premonition period (fake premonition period), which means that the right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state is not granted, a push order navigation image 22 showing the push order other than the special operation (reverse push) will be displayed below the CZ state image 50a on the screen of the main display 8.
For example, as shown in the figure, a push order navigation image 22 consisting of numerical information "1, 3, 2" is displayed, prompting the left reel 4a to stop first, the right reel 4c to stop second, and the center reel 4b to stop third.

If the right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state is granted when the special replay role is won, the symbol instruction image 52a and operation instruction image 52b will be displayed instead of the push order navigation image 22, and an instruction effect to stop the special symbol combination will be executed.

If the stop buttons 5 are pressed in a sequence other than the special operation (reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay role will stop, and as shown in Figure 38 (g), the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay role in which the replay symbols 54b are lined up on the active line on each reel 4 will stop.

If the conditions for terminating the CZ state are not met, then (not shown), at the start of the game following the game in which the special replay role was won, the premonition CZ state image 50b will be changed to the CZ state image 50a, the fake premonition period will end, and the performance during the CZ state will continue to be executed.
In this case, even if the push order navigation image 22 is ignored and a special operation is performed in the game, resulting in the "7-7-7" symbol combination (special symbol combination) stopping, the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is not granted, so the pseudo-bonus state will not be entered.

In addition, if a special replay role is won during the fake premonition period in more than the specified number of games, the CZ state will end when the special replay role is won, and the main display 8 will change to the effect image used in the normal game state.

Also, although not shown in the figures, if a normal replay role is won in a game during the fake premonition period, an instruction effect (fake instruction effect) is executed on the main display 8.
However, in this case, even if reel 4 stops according to the instructed presentation, the special pattern combination does not stop, so there is no transition to a pseudo-bonus state, and furthermore, the fake premonition period ends when a normal replay role is won, so when the next game starts, the premonition CZ state image 50b changes to the CZ state image 50a, the fake premonition period ends, and the presentation returns to that during the normal CZ state.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the fake instruction performance will be executed even if a normal replay role is won during the main premonition period, so the state transition after the end of this fake instruction performance will determine whether the state at that time is the main premonition period or the fake premonition period.
In addition, the fake premonition period may be set to end with a predetermined probability when a normal replay role is won. In this case, even if the premonition period continues after the fake instruction effect ends, the player will not be able to tell whether it is still a real premonition period or a fake premonition period, making it possible to prolong the player's anticipation.

In addition, if a normal replay role is won during the fake premonition period in a game that exceeds the specified number of games, an instruction effect (fake instruction effect) is executed on the main display 8.
In this case, the winning of a normal replay role ends not only the fake premonition period but also the CZ state itself, so the special pattern combination is not stopped, and with the start of the next game, the fake premonition period and CZ state end, and the game returns to the presentation during the normal game state.

In other words, if an instruction effect (including a fake instruction effect) is executed during the premonition period, the game may transition to a pseudo-bonus state (in the case of the main premonition period), or the premonition period may continue without transitioning to a pseudo-bonus state (in the case of the main premonition period), or the premonition period may end (in the case of the fake premonition period).

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, if a rare role is won in addition to a special replay role during a game in the CZ state, a lottery is held to transition to the pseudo bonus state, and if this transition lottery is won, the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted.

In other words, the main control unit 10, which serves as a special game state right granting means, can grant a special right (the right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state) based on the lottery result of the lottery means being a second lottery result (winning a rare role) that is different from the first lottery result (winning a special replay role).
Therefore, the transition patterns of the pseudo-bonus state during the CZ state become more diverse, making it possible to increase the interest of the game and the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, if a rare combination is won during the CZ state, granting the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state, the transition to the pseudo bonus state will not occur immediately, but will wait for a predetermined period of time before transitioning to the pseudo bonus state. If a special replay combination is won in a subsequent game, an instruction display will be executed to stop the special pattern combination that triggers the transition to the pseudo bonus state, allowing the pseudo bonus state to begin.

In other words, when a special right (right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state) is granted by the special game state right granting means (main control unit 10) based on the derivation of the second lottery result (winning a rare role), the sub-control unit 20, which serves as the notification control means, is able to wait to notify the special operation information (pattern indication image 52a, operation indication image 52b) until the lottery result of the lottery means (main control unit 10) becomes the first lottery result.

Therefore, even if the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is granted during the CZ state, it is possible to create a game mode in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state does not occur immediately, making it possible to further diversify gameplay during the CZ state.

Furthermore, even when the game is shifted to the pseudo bonus state after waiting, the game is shifted to the pseudo bonus state when a special replay role is won and a special symbol combination stops, so that the player can be sure to recognize that the game is shifting to the pseudo bonus state.
In addition, the special symbol combination is stopped by the player's stopping operation on reel 4, so a pseudo-bonus state occurs in the same progression as a so-called real bonus, making it possible to give the player even more enjoyment.

In addition, when a rare role is won in a game during the CZ state, if the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is not granted, the sub-controller 20 executes a CZ fake premonition effect for a predetermined period of time, and if the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted, it executes a CZ main premonition effect during the main premonition period, which is the period during which the transition to the pseudo bonus state is awaited.
In other words, the sub-controller 20 is equipped with an effect control means that can execute premonition effects (CZ main premonition effect, CZ fake premonition effect) based on the lottery result of the lottery means (main controller 10) being the second lottery result (winning a rare role).
Therefore, if a rare role is won in a game during the CZ state, it is possible to increase the interest in the game and also to increase the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, if the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted by winning a rare role during the CZ state, the transition to the pseudo bonus state will wait until a special replay role is won in a subsequent game.However, if a predetermined number of games (e.g., 30) have been played after the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state has been granted but the special replay role has not been won, the transition to the pseudo bonus state may be forced.
In addition, if a predetermined number of games (e.g., 30) have been played after the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state has been granted but the special replay role has not been won, a predetermined benefit (e.g., the right to extend the period of the pseudo-bonus state) may be granted.

In addition, if a rare role is won during the CZ state and the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is granted, the premonition period accompanied by the premonition effect will continue until a special replay role is won in a subsequent game. However, the premonition period may continue until a predetermined number of games (e.g., 10 games) have been played, and if a special replay role is not won during this time, an announcement may be made that the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state has been granted based on the end of the premonition period, and the player may transition to the pseudo bonus state.

In this case, if a special replay role is won during this premonition period, it is preferable to execute an instruction display in the winning game, and notify (transition to pseudo bonus state) that the right to transition to pseudo bonus state has been granted at that point (without waiting for the execution of the above-mentioned specified number of games), regardless of whether the special pattern combination has stopped or not.
Furthermore, even if a rare role is won during the CZ state and the right to transition to the pseudo bonus state is not granted, the fake premonition period (fake premonition effect) may be controlled to continue for only a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) as described above, and the fake premonition period may end when the predetermined number of games have been played.

Next, referring to Figure 39, the selection lottery for the number of games to continue in the pseudo bonus state during this premonition period will be described.
As mentioned above, the main control unit 10 sets the premonition period if the player wins the lottery to transition to the pseudo-bonus state in a game in which a rare role is won during the CZ state, and if the player wins a special replay role in a game during the premonition period, the game will transition to the pseudo-bonus state.When this special replay role is won, the number of games in which the pseudo-bonus state will continue is also determined.

Therefore, if a rare role is won during the CZ state and the state transitions to a pseudo bonus state, the number of games that the pseudo bonus state continues will change.
In addition, if the pseudo bonus state is entered not by winning a rare role but by winning a special replay role during the CZ state, the number of games that the pseudo bonus state continues will not change, and only the specified number of games (30 games) will be set.

Furthermore, in the game during this premonition period, there is a possibility of winning a rare role again, but in such a case, even though the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state has already been granted, the player will win a rare role with a low probability of winning, which may leave the player feeling dissatisfied.
In order to solve this problem, in this fourth embodiment, in the game during this premonition period, if a rare role is won again, control is performed so that the number of continuing games in the pseudo-bonus state that is advantageous to the player is more likely to be selected.

Figure 39 shows the winning probability for each number of continuing games determined by a selection lottery for the number of continuing games in the pseudo bonus state in the main control unit 10, and shows the selection lottery probability for the number of continuing games in the pseudo bonus state when transitioning to the pseudo bonus state during the premonition period in the CZ state.
In addition, the main control device 10 selects the number of games to continue in the pseudo bonus state by extracting a predetermined random number when each selection lottery trigger role is won.

As shown in Figure 38, if a rare role is won in a game during this premonition period, a selection lottery will be held to determine the number of games to continue in the pseudo bonus state as 30 games with a 50% probability, and as 50 games with a 50% probability.
During this premonition period, there is a possibility of winning a rare role multiple times, but the above lottery is held each time a rare role is won, and if 50 games are won even once, the number of continuing games is fixed at 50 games at that point, and if 30 games are won, a selection lottery is held again in the subsequent games when a rare role is won.

In addition, if a special replay role that triggers a transition to pseudo bonus state is won in a game during this premonition period, i.e., if the next game will transition to pseudo bonus state, a selection lottery will be held to determine the number of games to continue in pseudo bonus state as 30 with a 70% probability, and as 50 with a 30% probability, unless 50 games have already been determined when a rare role was won.

As described above, when the game transitions from the premonition period to the pseudo-bonus state, the number of games that continue in the pseudo-bonus state will change in various ways, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.
Furthermore, if a rare role is won during the CZ state and the actual premonition period begins, and if the player wins a rare role again in the subsequent game during the actual premonition period, a lottery will be held to select the number of games that will continue in the pseudo-bonus state.Therefore, if a rare role is won during the actual premonition period, there is a possibility that the number of games that will continue in the pseudo-bonus state will increase, and there is a possibility that advantageous benefits will be awarded to the player.

In other words, the main control unit 10 is equipped with a bonus lottery means that can execute a lottery to award a specific bonus (50 continuing games) in games after the special game state right awarding means (main control unit 10) has granted a special right (right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state) based on the second lottery result (winning a rare role).
Therefore, even if the player wins a rare role again during this premonition period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied and to increase the player's sense of expectation.

Furthermore, each time a rare role is won during this premonition period, the possibility of the number of continuing games increasing increases, so the longer this premonition period is, the more likely it is that the player's sense of anticipation will increase.
In particular, in this fourth embodiment, the premonition period is not fixed but continues until a special replay role is won, so even if the start of the pseudo-bonus state is delayed because the special replay role is not won, the possibility of a lottery being held to select the number of games to continue increases, making it possible to increase the player's expectations.

In addition, even if the number of continuing games is not determined to be 50 when a rare role is won during this premonition period, a selection lottery will be held again when a special replay role is won, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's expectations even if a rare role is not won during this premonition period.

The selection probability for each number of continuing games may be other than those mentioned above.
Furthermore, if a player wins a rare role during this premonition period, the bonus may be something other than an increase in the number of games played in a row, as long as the player receives a specific bonus.
Furthermore, the number of games to be continued set as an option for the pseudo bonus state may be other than those mentioned above, or three or more types may be set.
As described above, control is performed when a rare role is won during the CZ state in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment.

[Control form in gaming machine of fourth embodiment]
Next, the control mode in the gaming machine (slot machine 1) of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the slot machine 1 of this fourth embodiment, various effects during the CZ state are executed under the control of the sub-controller 20, which mainly receives control information from the main controller 10 and executes effects on the main display 8, for example.

However, when executing an instruction display (including a fake instruction display) that prompts the player to stop a special symbol combination during the CZ state, two different control modes are provided: one in which the sub-controller 20 controls the instruction display by receiving control information directly from the main controller 10, and one in which the sub-controller 20 controls the instruction display independently without receiving control information directly from the main controller 10.

Specifically, the control format is different when an instruction effect is given when a special replay role that results in a pseudo-bonus state during the CZ state is won, and when an instruction effect is given when a special replay role is won during this premonition period (when an instruction effect is given to start the pseudo-bonus state shown in Figure 38 (c)).

First, referring to Figure 40, we will explain the control form when executing instruction effects in a game in which a special replay role is won during the CZ state.
As shown in Figure 40, when an instruction display (an instruction display outside the premonition period) is performed when a special replay role that results in a pseudo-bonus state during the CZ state is won, the main control unit 10 sends control information to the sub-control unit 20 as special control information that instructs the execution of the instruction display, and upon receiving the control information, the sub-control unit 20 executes an instruction display on the main display unit 8 that prompts the special pattern combination to stop (arrow a4).

In other words, whenever the main control unit 10 wins a special replay role, it will send control information to the sub-control unit 20 informing it that the special replay role has been won, regardless of the state at that time. However, if the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state is won at this time, it will send control information instructing the execution of an instruction effect, and the sub-control unit 20 will execute the instruction effect based on the control information instructing the execution of this instruction effect.

In addition, if a special replay role is won but the pseudo bonus state is not won, the main control unit 10 will send control information prohibiting the execution of the instruction effect, and the sub-control unit 20, upon receiving this control information prohibiting the execution of the instruction effect, will execute an effect that does not stop the special pattern combination (push order navigation image 22 in Figure 35 (d)).
Also, during the fake premonition period, a special replay role may be won that results in a pseudo bonus state, and in this case too, the sub-controller 20 will execute the instruction performance based on the reception of control information instructing the execution of the instruction performance.

On the other hand, if a rare role that results in a pseudo-bonus state is won during the CZ state, and an instruction effect is performed when a special replay role is won during the subsequent premonition period, the main control unit 10 does not send control information (special control information) instructing the sub-control unit 20 to execute the instruction effect, but instead the sub-control unit 20 independently executes an instruction effect on the main display 8 that prompts the special pattern combination to stop (arrow b4).

In other words, when the main control unit 10 wins a special replay role, it will transmit control information informing it that the special replay role has been won. However, when the sub-control unit 20 receives control information informing it that the special replay role has been won, it will determine whether the current state is within the premonition period, and if it receives control information informing it that the special replay role has been won during the premonition period, it will execute the instruction effect without receiving control information instructing it to execute the instruction effect.

Furthermore, when the sub-controller 20 receives control information informing it that a special replay role has been won (but not won in the pseudo bonus state), it determines whether the state at that time is within the fake premonition period, and if it receives control information informing it that a special replay role has been won during the fake premonition period, it will execute an effect (push order navigation image 22 in Figure 35 (d)) that does not stop the special pattern combination without instructions from the main controller 10.
In addition, the sub-controller 20 performs management control that enables it to understand that the current state is during the main precursor period (or fake precursor period), for example, by receiving control information from the main controller 10 that indicates the start and end of the main precursor period (or fake precursor period).

As described above, when an instruction display is performed when a special replay role that results in a pseudo-bonus state is won during the CZ state, the sub-controller 20 executes an instruction display on the main display 8 that prompts the special symbol combination to stop upon receiving control information from the main controller 10 instructing the execution of an instruction display. On the other hand, when an instruction display is performed when a rare role that results in a pseudo-bonus state is won during the CZ state and a special replay role is subsequently won during the premonition period, the sub-controller 20 executes an instruction display on the main display 8 that prompts the special symbol combination to stop, without receiving control information from the main controller 10 instructing the execution of an instruction display.

In other words, in a game in which the lottery result of the lottery means (main control unit 10) is the first lottery result (winning a special replay role), if a special right (right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state) is granted by the special game state right granting means (main control unit 10), the sub-control unit 20 as notification control means can notify special operation information (symbol instruction image 52a, operation instruction image 52b) based on receiving special control information (control information instructing the execution of an instruction effect) from the main control unit 10, and if the special right is granted by the special game state right granting means based on deriving the second lottery result, the sub-control unit 20 can notify special operation information without receiving special control information (control information instructing the execution of an instruction effect) from the main control unit 10.

This reduces the processing burden on each control device when executing instruction performances, making it possible to execute instruction performances more efficiently and reliably.

Next, referring to Figure 41, we will explain the control form when executing a fake instruction effect in a game in which a normal replay role is won during the CZ state.
As mentioned above, if a normal replay role is won during the CZ state, a fake instruction display (see Figure 36) may be executed on the main display 8.

In this fourth embodiment, just as when executing the instruction performance described above, when executing a fake instruction performance, different control modes are provided: one in which the sub-controller 20 controls the fake instruction performance by receiving control information directly from the main controller 10, and one in which the sub-controller 20 controls the fake instruction performance independently without receiving control information directly from the main controller 10.

Specifically, as with the execution of the instruction effects described above, when a fake instruction effect is performed when a normal replay role is won outside the premonition period during the CZ state, the sub-controller 20 executes the fake instruction effect on the main display 8 based on control information from the main controller 10 instructing the execution of the fake instruction effect. However, when a fake instruction effect is performed when a normal replay role is won during the premonition period, the sub-controller 20 executes the fake instruction effect on the main display 8 without control information from the main controller 10 instructing the execution of the fake instruction effect.

Furthermore, if a normal replay role is won outside the premonition period during the CZ state, the main control unit 10 conducts a lottery to determine with a fixed probability (for example, 50%) whether or not to execute a fake instruction effect, and based on this lottery, control information is sent to the sub-control unit 20 instructing it to execute a fake instruction effect.However, if a normal replay role is won in a game during this premonition period during the CZ state, the sub-control unit 20 conducts a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a fake instruction effect, and the probability of executing a fake instruction effect at the time of this lottery can be changed based on the player's operation.
Furthermore, during the fake premonition period, the fake premonition period (or CZ state) will end based on the winning of a normal replay role, so the sub-controller 20 is always made to execute the fake instruction performance, and in this case too, the sub-controller 20 is made to execute the fake instruction performance independently.

Figure 41 shows the control form when executing a fake instruction effect in a game in which a normal replay role is won during the premonition period in the CZ state.
That is, this shows a control form in which the sub-control device 20 executes fake instruction performance independently.

As shown in Figure 41, if a normal replay role is won during the main premonition period in the CZ state, the main control unit 10 does not send control information to the sub-control unit 20 instructing it to execute a fake instruction effect, but only sends control information informing it that a normal replay role has been won (arrow c4).When the sub-control unit 20 receives control information informing it that a normal replay role has been won, it determines whether the current state is within the main premonition period, and if it is within the main premonition period, it executes a fake instruction effect with a predetermined probability.

As shown in the figure, the sub-controller 20 has a mode 1 that controls the execution of the fake instruction effect with a first probability (for example, 40%), and a mode 2 that controls it with a second probability (for example, 60%) that is higher than the first probability, and when control information indicating that a normal replay role has been won is received, the probability of executing the fake instruction effect can be changed according to these modes.
In addition, the sub-controller 20 allows mode change control based on the operation of the effect button 2d, and the player can change to the desired mode by operating the effect button 2d.

Therefore, when mode 1 is selected based on the operation of effect button 2d, the execution of the fake instruction effect during this premonition period is controlled to be executed with a first probability (e.g., 40%), and when mode 2 is selected, the execution of the fake instruction effect during this premonition period is controlled to be executed with a second probability (e.g., 60%).

The above-mentioned mode change can be performed, for example, by displaying a mode selection screen on the main display 8 when no game is being played (the so-called call-in state) and operating the mode selection screen with the effect button 2d, or by displaying a mode selection screen on the sub-display 17 and operating it with a touch operation, but it is preferable to make the selection possible before the premonition period.

Also, although not shown in the figure, if the sub-controller 20 receives control information informing it of a win of a normal replay role during the fake premonition period, it will always execute a fake instruction performance.
Therefore, if a normal replay role is won during the fake premonition period, the fake instruction effect will always be executed, and as a result, the fake premonition period (or CZ state) will end without the special pattern combination stopping.

As described above, if a normal replay role is won outside the premonition period during the CZ state, the sub-controller 20 will execute a fake instruction effect on the main display 8 upon receiving control information from the main controller 10 instructing the execution of a fake instruction effect, whereas if a normal replay role is won during the premonition period, the sub-controller 20 will execute a fake instruction effect on the main display 8 on its own without receiving control information from the main controller 10 instructing the execution of a fake instruction effect.

This reduces the processing burden on each control device when executing fake instruction performances, making it possible to execute fake instruction performances more efficiently and reliably.

In addition, the sub-controller 20 can execute the fake instruction effect with either a first probability or a second probability when a normal replay role is won during this premonition period.
Therefore, the presentation during this premonition period can be made more diverse, making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, the sub-controller 20 can change the probability of executing a fake instruction effect when a normal replay role is won during this premonition period, based on the operation of the effect button 2d.
In other words, the sub-controller 20 as a notification control means is capable of notifying special operation information (pattern indication image 52a, operation indication image 52b) with a predetermined probability in a game in which the lottery result of the lottery means (main controller 10) is not the first lottery result (winning the special replay role), and is equipped with a notification change control means that can change the predetermined probability based on the player's operation.

Therefore, depending on the player's preferences, it is possible to change between a mode in which fake instruction effects are frequently executed (Mode 2) and a mode in which fake instruction effects are rarely executed (Mode 1), making it possible to play in a way that satisfies a large number of players.

The execution probability of the fake instruction performance in mode 1 and mode 2 may be any as long as the execution probability is different.
In addition, three or more modes with different execution probabilities of fake instruction effects may be provided.
In addition, the fake instruction effect is executed when a normal replay role is won, but it may be executed when any role other than the special replay role is won.
As described above, the control mode in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is realized.

The above has described the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, but instead of providing a special replay role, when a normal replay role is won, if a special operation (reverse push) is performed the symbol combination of "7 7 7" will stop, and if an operation other than the special operation is performed the symbol combination of "replay replay replay" will stop, and a lottery for a pseudo bonus state may be held when a normal replay role is won.
In this case, during the main premonition period resulting from the winning of a rare role, an instruction display may be given to stop the symbol combination "7, 7, 7" when a normal replay is won.

In addition, when a rare role is won during the premonition period, a lottery is held to select the number of games to continue in the pseudo bonus state, but a lottery may also be held to add the number of additional games to the pseudo bonus state to the initial number of games to be played each time a rare role is won.
The slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment is configured as described above.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, a fifth embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

In the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment (slot machine 1), only some of the game state transition control and presentation content differ from those of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and the rest is the same as in the first embodiment.
Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, only the points that are different from the first embodiment will be described, and the other points are the same as the first embodiment described above, so the description will be omitted.

First, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, part of the configuration of winning combinations is different from that of the first embodiment, and a bonus winning combination is set in addition to the replay winning combination and the small winning combination.
A bonus role is a role that generates a bonus state, which is a so-called real bonus, and the generation of a bonus state based on winning a bonus role means that, for example, the lottery for a predetermined role will be advantageous to the player.

In addition to the normal replay role and chance replay role (chance role), there is also a special replay role that is a rare role.
The special replay role will be described in detail later, but for example, when won, it is a role that can grant a player a specified benefit during the AT state, and the probability of winning is set lower than that of a normal replay role (for example, 1/100).

In addition, in the slot machine 1 of this fifth embodiment, the types of game states are also different from those of the first embodiment described above, and instead of providing a CZ state and a pseudo bonus state, a bonus state is provided.
Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the gaming states are the normal gaming state, the bonus state, and the AT state.

If the bonus combination is won, the reels 4 are controlled to stop in the following games so that a "7-7-7" symbol combination (special symbol combination) is allowed on the active line set on each reel 4. If the "7-7-7" symbol combination stops on an active line, a bonus combination is won and the game state transitions to bonus state.

That is, in the first embodiment, in the first game during the pseudo bonus state, the symbol combination of "7-7-7" is pseudo-stopped by executing a pseudo game, but in the fifth embodiment, control is performed so that the bonus state is generated by stopping the symbol combination of "7-7-7".
When a bonus combination is won, no game value such as medals is awarded, and the right to win a bonus combination is maintained until the bonus combination is won.
In the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the pay line for determining whether or not a win has been won is set only to the middle line connecting the symbols stopped in the middle of each reel 4.

[Transition of gaming state in gaming machine of fifth embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the transition of the gaming state in the slot machine 1 in the fifth embodiment will be described.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state in the slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment.
As shown in Figure 42, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the main control unit 10 is capable of transitioning to any one of the normal gaming state, the bonus state, and the AT state, and is capable of executing control to transition from one gaming state to another gaming state based on the establishment of predetermined transition conditions.

Below, we will provide a detailed explanation of each game state (normal game state, bonus state, AT state) executed under the control of the main control unit 10 and sub-control unit 20, the transition process between game states, and the various effects that occur as a result of the transition process.

Unless otherwise specified below, the transition from one game state to another generally occurs after the third reel is stopped in the game in which the transition condition is met (or after medals have been paid out). However, this is not limited to this, and the transition may occur from the next game after the transition condition is met.

(Normal gameplay state)
The normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the player remains when the main controller 10 of the slot machine 1 is reset, and is a disadvantageous state for the player.
42, the main control device 10 performs lottery processing for transition to the bonus state and the AT state while remaining in the normal gaming state. Note that, depending on the specifications of the slot machine 1, it may not be possible to directly transition from the normal gaming state to the AT state.

As in the first embodiment, during normal game play, individual effects, including winning effects that are completed in one game, are executed with a predetermined probability on the main display 8 or sub-display 17 based on the results of the lottery for winning roles, etc.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, there are a normal probability state and a high probability state, which have different winning probabilities for transitioning to the AT state. The winning probability of the lottery for transitioning to the AT state is higher in the high probability state than in the normal probability state, and the transition from the probability state is controlled so that, for example, when a weak watermelon or weak cherry role is won, the transition from the normal probability state to the high probability state occurs with a 30% probability. On the other hand, as a predetermined fall condition, for example, when a replay role is won, when a push order bell role is won, or when a miss occurs, the transition from the high probability state to the normal probability state occurs with a 5% probability.
In response to the change in the probability state, a stage change process is carried out in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, and in some high probability states, the stage is changed to one that suggests a high probability state.

Transition process from normal game state to bonus state (arrow a5 in FIG. 42)
In the normal gaming state, if the result of the role determination by the main control device 10 is that a bonus role is won, the game can be transitioned to a bonus state (benefit) as a special gaming state.

More specifically, based on the winning of a bonus role as a special lottery result, the main control device 10 performs stop control to allow a special symbol combination ("7-7-7") to appear on reel 4 as a special symbol pattern, and when a special symbol combination is drawn on reel 4 based on the player's operation, the game state is transitioned to a bonus state, which is a special game state advantageous to the player.

In other words, the main control unit 10 is equipped with a special game state control means that can generate a first special game state (bonus state) as a special game state based on the establishment of a first special condition (derivation of a special lottery result).
Therefore, while the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above was capable of generating a pseudo-bonus state, the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment is capable of generating a bonus state (a so-called real bonus) without generating a pseudo-bonus state.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, a pseudo-bonus state may be generated in addition to the bonus state.
In addition, the bonus role may be won at the same time as a predetermined rare role (for example, a strong cherry role) (a double win), or may be won separately from other roles, or there may be winning patterns for both double wins and single wins.
Furthermore, since the bonus role gives the player an opportunity to win a large number of medals, it is preferable to set the probability of winning lower than that of the small role or the replay role (for example, to a probability of about 1/250).
In addition, the probability of winning a bonus role may be made variable in multiple stages according to the setting value of the probability setting device 14 .

Furthermore, when a bonus role is won during normal game play, a continuous performance spanning a predetermined number of games, which is executed immediately before the transition to the pseudo-bonus state of the first embodiment, is executed, for example, on the main display 8, to heighten the player's sense of anticipation.
When the continuous performance is executed, an image showing that the main character wins the battle performance is displayed, and an image informing the player that a bonus role has been won is displayed, and an image urging the player to stop the special symbol combination is displayed on the main display 8.
However, since it is possible to stop the special symbol combination even in a game during a continuous performance, if the special symbol combination is stopped in a game during a continuous performance, the continuous performance will end at that point.

Furthermore, based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions, an effect similar to the continuous effect will be executed on the main display device 8 even in games in which a bonus role has not been won. For example, if a bonus role is configured to be winnable in combination with a predetermined rare role, when a predetermined rare role that has not been won as a bonus role is won, a continuous effect will be executed in which the main character is ultimately defeated.

・Transition process from normal gaming state to AT state (arrow c5 in FIG. 42)
In the normal gaming state, the main control device 10 performs a lottery process to transition to the AT state, which is a special gaming state, based on the winning of a predetermined rare combination. For example, when a strong cherry combination is won, the transition process to the AT state is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1%). The condition for transitioning to the AT state is winning this transition lottery.
In addition, in a game in a high probability state, control is performed to increase the probability of transitioning to the AT state. For example, when a strong cherry role is won, the transition process to the AT state is performed with a higher probability (for example, 2%) than the winning probability in a normal probability state.
In addition, the transition to the AT state in the normal game state may be made on the condition that a predetermined rare role is won, or may be made with a predetermined probability (for example, 1%) when a losing lottery result is derived in which no small role is won.

In this fifth embodiment, the transition to the AT state is mainly performed via the bonus state in order to increase the player's sense of anticipation, and therefore the probability of transitioning directly from the normal game state to the AT state is set to an extremely low probability.
In addition, the probability of transitioning directly from the normal game state to the AT state may be made changeable depending on the set probability in the probability setting device 14, or it may be possible to win the lottery for transitioning directly from the normal game state to the AT state only in the case of a relatively high set value (for example, setting 4 to 6).

Furthermore, if the player wins the lottery to transition to the AT state during normal game play, a premonition effect (including continuous effects) is executed after the waiting period has elapsed, as in the case of the occurrence of the pseudo-bonus state in the first embodiment, and the AT state occurs after the premonition effect has ended.
In addition, if a specified rare role (for example, a strong cherry role) is won but the AT state is not entered, a fake premonition effect similar to that which occurs when the pseudo bonus state in the first embodiment occurs is executed.

In addition, when the lottery for transitioning directly from the normal game state to the AT state is won, the consecutive effects may be executed immediately without executing the premonition effect, and the transition to the AT state may be made after the execution of the consecutive effects.
In addition, similar to the transition to the pseudo bonus state in the first embodiment, a CZ state that can transition to an AT state may be provided.

(Bonus state)
The bonus state as a special gaming state (first special gaming state) is a state in which the control relating to the lottery of winning combinations by the main control device 10 is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state.
That is, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, a pseudo-bonus state is generated as a state advantageous to the player, whereas in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, a bonus state, which is a so-called real bonus, is generated as a state advantageous to the player.

In the bonus state, the bonus state continues until the number of medals paid out during the bonus state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 150 medals), and the lottery control for the roles during that time is changed so that, for example, in a game during the bonus state, the probability of winning the common bell role is made higher than in a game during the normal game state.
Also, in the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when any of the push order bell roles 1 to 6 is won, the main control unit 10 performs stop control so that the corresponding push order bell role will win only if a stop operation is performed using the push order (specific stop mode) corresponding to the winning push order bell role.

However, other control methods may be used to benefit players during the bonus state. For example, the probability of winning a specified rare role may be increased compared to a game during the normal game state, or the probability of winning a replay role may be decreased compared to a game during the normal game state, thereby increasing the chances of winning the push order bell role. The probability of winning the push order bell role may also be increased.

In addition, the number of medals paid out when a bell role (push order bell role and common bell role) is won may be set to be different between the bonus state and other game states.
For example, when a bell role is won during the normal game state, six medals are paid out, but when a bell role is won during the bonus state, fifteen medals may be paid out.

The condition for ending the bonus state is set as when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 150 medals), but it can also be set to something else, such as when the number of games played during the bonus state reaches a predetermined number. The bonus state may also be ended when the number of medals won by the player during the bonus state (net increase in medals) exceeds a predetermined number, or when the number of medals won by the player due to winning the bell role during the bonus state (net increase in medals) exceeds a predetermined number.

Furthermore, as will be described in more detail later, during the bonus state, effects are performed that make it impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish that the game state at that time is in the AT state, so when the common bell role is won in all or part, the same push order navigation as when the push order bell role is won may be executed.
In this case, if the common bell role is won, a push order navigation may be executed that indicates a fixed push order out of six possible push orders (for example, "5a → 5b → 5c"), or a push order navigation may be executed by randomly determining the push order.

During the bonus state, based on control information from the main control unit 10, the sub-control unit 20 executes the push order navigation for the push order bell role described above to notify the player of advantageous operation modes, making it easier to win medals.

Furthermore, as will be described in more detail later, in a game during the bonus state, the main control unit 10 performs a lottery process for transitioning to the AT state in a way that is advantageous to the player, and controls the game so that there is a predetermined probability of winning the AT state for each game.
If the player wins the lottery to transition to the AT state during a game in the bonus state, the player is granted the right to transition to the AT state, and is able to transition to the AT state after the bonus state ends.
In other words, the main control unit 10, which serves as a special game state control means, is capable of generating a second special game state (AT state) as a special game state based on the establishment of the second special condition (winning the lottery to transition to the AT state).

The probability of winning the AT state may be any probability that transitions to the AT state is higher than the probability of winning the AT state during the normal probability state (for example, 1%).
In addition, during a part of the bonus state, a transition lottery may be held to increase the probability of winning the AT state.

In addition, when a bonus role is won, a lottery to transition to the AT state is held, and just as with the lottery to transition to the AT state in a game during the bonus state, if the transition lottery is won, the right to transition to the AT state will be granted.

Furthermore, during the bonus state, the sub-controller 20 performs various effects during the bonus state, and for example, effects that allow the player to recognize that they are in the bonus state are executed on the main display 8.
Furthermore, when the bonus state is generated, the lamp 11 emits light in a predetermined manner to notify that the bonus state is in effect, and the speaker 9 outputs a predetermined sound effect to notify that the bonus state is in effect.
In other words, the sub-controller 20 is equipped with a special effect control means that is capable of executing a first special effect that allows the player to recognize that the first special game state has occurred, based on the occurrence of the first special game state (bonus state).

Furthermore, as will be described later, when a bonus role is won or the AT state transition lottery is won during the bonus state, the game state will transition to the AT state after the bonus state ends. However, in this fifth embodiment, display control is performed in such a way that it is impossible or difficult to distinguish between the bonus state and the AT state. Therefore, even if the AT state transition lottery is won during the bonus state, no presentation will be performed during the bonus state to notify the player that the AT state transition lottery has been won.

Furthermore, when the gaming state shifts to the bonus state, information indicating that the state is the bonus state is output from the external output terminal 18.
In addition, in order to prevent the island equipment call device (not shown) at the gaming facility from making a notification that distinguishes between the bonus state and the AT state, it is possible to output common information for both the bonus state and the AT state.

・Transition process from bonus state to AT state (arrow e5 in FIG. 42)
The bonus state ends when a predetermined ending condition is met.
The condition for ending the bonus state is met when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state (including any medals missed) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 150 medals).
The condition for ending the bonus state may be other than the above, and may be when the number of games played during the bonus state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50).

If the right to transition to the AT state is granted at the end of the bonus state, the game state will transition from the bonus state to the AT state as a special game state (second special game state).
However, even if the game state shifts from the bonus state to the AT state, the various effects that were being performed during the bonus state will continue as they are.
During the AT state, the push order navigation is executed in the same way as during the bonus state, and the presentation content basically remains the same as during the bonus state, so even if the game state shifts from the bonus state to the AT state, the player will perceive that the bonus state is continuing as it is.

Transition process from bonus state to normal game state (arrow b5 in FIG. 42)
If the right to transition to the AT state has not been granted at the end of the bonus state, the game state will transition from the bonus state to the normal game state when the conditions for ending the bonus state are met.
At this time, after the final game in the bonus state is completed, an image informing that the bonus state has ended and an image informing the number of medals acquired during the bonus state are displayed on the main display 8, and the game state will transition to the normal game state from the next game.

In addition, when transitioning from the bonus state to the normal game state, setting-related information (setting suggestion information) that can suggest the setting value set by the probability setting device 14 may be announced by the announcement means (main display 8, sub-display 17, speaker 9) under the control of the sub-controller 20 based on control information from the main controller 10. For example, a predetermined character may be displayed from among multiple characters on the main display 8 or sub-display 17, and the displayed character may be selected according to a selection probability that is preset in accordance with each setting value of the probability setting device 14, making it possible to predict the setting value to some extent from the displayed character.

(AT state)
The AT state is a game state in which it is easy to win medals, as push order navigation for the winning push order bell role is continuously carried out during the period in which the game is in the AT state to notify the player of an operation mode that is advantageous to the player.
However, unlike the bonus state, the lottery control for the winning combination is the same as that in the normal game state, and therefore the lottery control for each winning combination is executed in the same manner as in the normal game state.

During the AT state, the continuation of the AT state is managed as the number of remaining medals that can continue the AT state, which is a predetermined number of medals (for example, 100 or 150 medals) that are awarded at the time of the initial transition to the AT state, and this number is subtracted each time a medal is paid out as the game is played, and the AT state continues until the number of remaining medals is depleted.
Furthermore, in a game during the AT state, for example, when a rare role is won, an additional lottery is held in which a predetermined number of medals is added to the remaining number of medals with a predetermined probability, and if the additional lottery is won, the remaining number of medals increases, thereby extending the duration of the AT state.

For example, if a strong cherry role is won, either 50 or 100 medals will be added to the number of remaining medals, and if a special replay role is won, an additional lottery will be held in which either 30 or 50 medals will be added to the number of remaining medals.
The trigger role for the additional lottery, the number of medals added, or the probability of winning the additional lottery may be any of these, but it is preferable that the additional lottery be more advantageous to the player for roles with relatively lower winning probabilities.
When the number of remaining medals is exhausted in the AT state, the AT state ends.

In this fifth embodiment, the termination condition for the AT state is set to be met based on the number of medals paid out, similar to the termination condition for the bonus state, in order to increase the interest in the bonus state and various effects (for example, continuation effects) during the AT state. However, the termination condition for the AT state may also be set to be met based on the number of medals (net increase in number) acquired by the player during the AT state.
In addition, a predetermined number of games (e.g., 30 games) may be awarded at the initial transition to the AT state, and the continuation of the AT state may be managed as the number of remaining games that can be continued, with the number of remaining games being subtracted for each game, so that the AT state continues until there are no more remaining games.

During the AT state, control information regarding the AT state is transmitted from the main control unit 10 to the sub-control unit 20, and various performance images are displayed on the main display 8 under the control of the sub-control unit 20.
As mentioned above, it is basically impossible (or difficult) to distinguish between the bonus state and the AT state, so even when the game transitions to the AT state, the main display 8 displays the same effects as in the bonus state.

Although details will be described later, when a predetermined condition is met in the AT state, the sub-controller 20 may control the execution of a presentation that allows the player to recognize that the AT state is in effect.
In other words, the sub-control device 20, which serves as a special effect control means, is capable of executing a second special effect that allows the player to recognize that a second special game state has occurred, based on the occurrence of the second special game state (AT state).

・Transition process from AT state to bonus state (arrow f5 in Figure 42)
During the AT state (second special game state), the main control device 10 draws the winning combinations in the same manner as during the normal game state.
Therefore, even during the AT state, the lottery for the bonus role is conducted in the same manner as in the normal game state, and if the bonus role is won, the right to transition to the bonus state is granted.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, in a game in which a bonus role and another role are both won, the main control device 10 performs priority stop control so that the role other than the bonus role is stopped preferentially.
In addition, if a bonus role is won during the AT state, the fact that the bonus role has been won is not notified, and furthermore, even in the game after the bonus role is won (bonus winning state), if the push order bell role is won, push order navigation is executed.

Therefore, if a bonus role is won during the AT state, there is no change in presentation from the state before the bonus role was won, and since other roles (push order bell role, etc.) are frequently given priority to winning during the AT state, the player will play the game during the AT state without realizing that he or she has won the bonus role.
Then, based on the end of the AT state, it is announced that a bonus role has been won (the right to transition to the bonus state has been acquired), and in the game after the end of the AT state, it becomes possible to immediately transition to the bonus state.
Also, as described above, when a bonus role is won during the AT state, and during a game during the bonus state, a lottery to transition to the AT state is held again.

The notification of the winning of the bonus role may be made in the final game of the AT state (including after the game ends), or in the game following the final game of the AT state.
Also, in a game in the AT state, if all roles other than the bonus role are non-winning, it is possible to stop the special symbol combination, but in this case, it is preferable to perform a performance that does not stop the special symbol combination.

For example, it is preferable to set a blank symbol (preferably a relatively conspicuous symbol) on a specific reel 4 that overlaps with the symbol ("7") that makes up the special symbol combination and has a gap that makes it impossible to draw in, and then, in a game during the AT state in which a bonus role has been won, if all roles other than the bonus role have not been won, to execute an effect that encourages the player to perform a stop operation aimed at this blank symbol.

However, in a game in which a bonus role has been won during the AT state, if all roles other than the bonus role are non-winning, the special symbol combination can be stopped, and so when a special symbol combination stops, the game state will transition from the AT state to the bonus role at that point.

When a special symbol combination stops during a game in the AT state, the AT state being executed is temporarily interrupted and the game state is shifted to a bonus state, and when the bonus state ends, the game state is shifted to the AT state again.
Furthermore, when the AT state transitions to the bonus state, the number of remaining medals in the AT state is reserved at the time of transition to the bonus state, and when the AT state is returned to again, the AT state is resumed from the reserved number of remaining medals (arrow e5 in Figure 42).

However, if the game transitions to the bonus state during the AT state, unlike when the game transitions to the bonus state during normal play (including after the AT state has ended), the lottery process for transitioning to the AT state will not be carried out, and the bonus state will end and the game will return to the AT state when a predetermined number of medals have been paid out.

In addition, when a transition from an AT state to a bonus state occurs, instead of a lottery to transition to the AT state, a lottery may be held in the game during the bonus state to add (add) a predetermined number of medals (for example, 10 medals) to the number of remaining medals in the AT state.
However, in this case, it is preferable to draw a lottery in such a way that the player can receive a greater benefit when transitioning to the bonus state after the end of the AT state than when transitioning to the bonus state from the middle of the AT state.

・Transition process from AT state to normal gaming state (arrow d5 in FIG. 42)
In the AT state, if the condition for terminating the AT state is met, that is, if there are no more medals remaining in the AT state, the game will transition to the normal game state after the AT state ends.
In addition, even if the right to transition to the bonus state is granted in a game during the AT state, if the conditions for ending the AT state are met, the game will transition to the normal game state once. In this case, however, the game will immediately transition to the bonus state when a special pattern combination stops during the normal game state.

When the AT state is shifted to the normal game state, the winning probability state of the AT state is controlled to be the normal probability state. At this time, the state may be shifted to the high probability state with a predetermined probability for each setting in the probability setting device 14.
In addition, when transitioning to a high probability state after the end of the AT state, there is a possibility that restriction control (limiter control) will be performed by the aforementioned restriction means during the high probability state, but if restriction control is performed during the high probability state, the state will be transitioned to a normal probability state.

In addition, at the end of the AT state, an ending state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), and during the ending state, the game progress is temporarily disabled, and after the ending state ends, the game transitions to the normal game state.
During the ending state, setting-related information that can suggest the setting value set by the probability setting device 14 is notified by the notification means under the control of the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20. For example, a predetermined image is displayed on the main display 8 and the sub-display 17, and a predetermined sound is output by the speaker 9.
As described above, the transition of the gaming state in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment is carried out.

[AT state transition lottery control in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment]
Next, with reference to Figures 43 and 44, the lottery control for transition to the AT state in the slot machine 1 in the fifth embodiment will be described.

As mentioned above, when a bonus role is won, or during a game in the bonus state, the main control unit 10 conducts a lottery to transition to the AT state, and if this transition lottery is won, the player is granted the right to transition to the AT state.
Below, we will explain the probability of each lottery result when the main control device 10 conducts a lottery to transition to the AT state.

First, Figure 43 shows the probability of each lottery result in the lottery for transitioning to the AT state when a bonus role is won.
In addition, when a bonus role is won, the main control device 10 draws a predetermined random number to determine whether to transition to the AT state.
In addition, if a bonus role is won during the AT state, a similar transition lottery will be held.

As shown in Figure 43, in the lottery for transitioning to the AT state when a bonus role is won, there is a 90% probability of not winning the AT state, a 9% probability of winning the AT state with an initial number of remaining medals of 100, and a 1% probability of winning the AT state with an initial number of remaining medals of 150.
If the player wins the AT state through the transition lottery, the player is granted the right to transition to the AT state from the time when the bonus role is won, and the corresponding number of remaining medals is stored and held.

As described above, when a bonus role is won, a lottery is held to determine whether to transition to the AT state, which means that there is a possibility that the right to transition to the AT state will be granted even before the transition to the bonus state occurs, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation.
Furthermore, by drawing a lottery for transitioning to an AT state, it is possible to generate AT states with different numbers of remaining medals initially awarded, which makes it possible to generate a wider variety of AT states and increase the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, the lottery for transitioning to the AT state when a bonus role is won is also executed when a bonus role is won in a game during the AT state. Therefore, if the lottery for transitioning to the AT state is won at this time, it is determined that the game will transition to the bonus state after the AT state ends, and that the game will transition to the AT state again after the bonus state ends.
The number of remaining medals initially awarded is set to the number of medals paid out during the AT state, but it may also be set to the number of medals the player acquires during the AT state (net increase in medals).

Next, Figure 44 shows the probability of each lottery result in the AT state transition lottery and the additional lottery when each game is played during the bonus state.
The main control device 10 performs each lottery by sampling a predetermined random number when a game in which the lottery is performed is executed.

First, FIG. 44(a) shows the lottery result when the right to transition to the AT state has not yet been granted.
As shown in Figure 44 (a), if a role other than a rare role is won in a game during the bonus state, a lottery is held to determine whether the player will not win the AT state with a 95% probability, will win the AT state with an initial number of remaining medals of 100 with a 4% probability, or will win the AT state with an initial number of remaining medals of 150 with a 1% probability.

In addition, if a rare combination is won in a game during the bonus state, a lottery for transition to the AT state is held so that there is a 60% probability of not winning the AT state, a 30% probability of winning the AT state with an initial number of remaining medals of 100, and a 10% probability of winning the AT state with an initial number of remaining medals of 150.
If the player wins the transition lottery to the AT state, the player is granted the right to transition to the AT state when the game is played during the bonus state, and the corresponding number of remaining medals is stored and held.

Next, Figure 44 (b) shows the results of the additional lottery in a game in the bonus state after the right to transition to the AT state has already been granted, that is, when a bonus role is won or in a game in the bonus state, after the lottery to transition to the AT state has already been won.
In this fifth embodiment, if the right to transition to the AT state has already been granted, the right to transition to the AT state is not granted, and instead an additional lottery is held to add (add) a predetermined number of medals to the remaining number of medals in the AT state that will occur thereafter.

As shown in Figure 44 (b), if a role other than a rare role is won in a game during a bonus state in which the right to transition to the AT state has already been granted, there is a 93% chance that the player will not win the bonus lottery, a 5% chance that they will win by adding 10 medals to the number of remaining medals, and a 2% chance that they will win by adding 20 medals to the number of remaining medals.

In addition, if a rare role is won in a game in a bonus state in which the right to transition to the AT state has already been granted, an additional lottery will be held in which there is a 20% probability of not winning, a 50% probability of winning to add (add) 10 medals to the number of remaining medals, and a 30% probability of winning to add (add) 20 medals to the number of remaining medals.
If the player wins the additional medal lottery, the number of remaining medals increased by the number of additional medals will be stored.

As described above, since a lottery for transitioning to the AT state is held in games during the bonus state, there is a possibility that the right to transition to the AT state will be granted in each game during the bonus state, which can increase the player's sense of anticipation.
In addition, if a rare role is won, the lottery for transition to the AT state will be more advantageous to the player than if a role other than a rare role is won.
Therefore, if a rare combination is won in a game during a bonus state, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, even in games during the bonus state after the right to transition to the AT state has been granted, a lottery is held to add a specified number of medals to the remaining number of medals. Therefore, for example, if a rare combination is won, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction due to the fact that the lottery to transition to the AT state is not held, and to increase the player's sense of anticipation.

In addition, if a bonus role is won in a game during the AT state, but the bonus state occurs in the middle of the AT state without waiting for the AT state to end, it is preferable that a lottery to transition to the AT state is not held in the game during the bonus state, and instead an additional lottery as shown in Figure 44 (b) is held.
Therefore, in this case, if a bonus role is won in a game during the AT state, it is more advantageous for the player to transition to the bonus state after the AT state ends.

The probability of each lottery result may be other than those mentioned above as long as it can form the above-mentioned tendency.
Furthermore, the number of remaining medals that determines the duration of the AT state may be other than the above, or three or more options may be provided.
Furthermore, the number of medals added may be other than those mentioned above, or three or more options may be provided.
In addition, the lottery results may be changed depending on the type of rare role that is won. For example, if a rare role with a relatively low probability of winning (such as a strong cherry role) is won, the lottery may be held to derive a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player.
As described above, the lottery control for transition to the AT state is performed in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment.

[Control when winning the lottery to transition to the AT state during the bonus state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment]
Next, referring to Figures 45 to 47, we will explain the control by the main control unit 10 and the display control (display content) by the sub-control unit 20 in the gaming machine (slot machine 1) of this fifth embodiment when the lottery for transitioning to the AT state is won during the bonus state.

First, referring to the timing chart in Figure 45, we will explain the transition of the game state according to the progress of the game and the display content (presentation) on the main display 8 when the lottery for transitioning to the AT state is won during the bonus state.
As shown in FIG. 45, when a bonus role is won in a game in the normal game state (timing t50), the right to transition to the bonus state is granted, and in subsequent games, the stopping control of reel 4, which can stop a special pattern combination, is performed.
When a bonus role is won, a lottery for transition to the AT state is held, but in the figure, the transition lottery at this time is not won.

In addition, in a game after winning a bonus combination in the normal gaming state, an instruction effect is executed on the main display 8 to prompt the player to stop a special symbol combination.
Then, when the player confirms the above instruction display and performs an appropriate operation to stop the special symbol combination, the special symbol combination ("7 7 7") is stopped on the pay line of reel 4 (timing t51).

When a special symbol combination stops, the game state is changed from the normal game state to the bonus state, and the presentation on the main display 8 etc. is changed from the presentation corresponding to the normal game state to the presentation corresponding to the bonus state (first special presentation).
In addition, when the transition to the bonus state results in the winning of the push order bell role in each game, push order navigation is executed on the main display 8.
In addition, the push order navigation may also be performed if the common bell role is won at this time.

When the gaming state shifts to the bonus state, a lottery for shifting to the AT state is held in the game during the bonus state.
Then, in a game during the bonus state, if the player wins the lottery to transition to the AT state (timing t52), the right to transition to the AT state is granted.
Therefore, from then on, the game will be played in the bonus state with the right to transition to the AT state granted.

Also, even if the transition lottery to the AT state is won, the presentation on the main display 8 will not change, and the presentation corresponding to the bonus state (first special presentation) will continue to be executed.
Then, during the bonus state, when a game (final game) is played in which the conditions for ending the bonus state are met (timing t53), the bonus state ends at the end of that game.
If the right to transition to the AT state has been granted at this time, the effect announcing the end of the bonus state will not be executed, and the next game can be started.

Then, when the next game starts after the bonus state ends (timing t54), the gaming state transitions to the AT state.
Furthermore, even if the gaming state is changed from the bonus state to the AT state, the main display 8 will continue to execute the effect (first special effect) corresponding to the bonus state.
Therefore, even if the gaming state is shifted from the bonus state to the AT state, the player will continue playing the game without noticing this.

Then, when a game is executed during the AT state in which the conditions for ending the AT state are met (timing t55), the AT state ends at the end of that game.
In addition, upon the end of the AT state, the game state is changed from the AT state to the normal game state, and the presentation on the main display 8, etc. is changed from the presentation corresponding to the AT state (second special presentation) to the presentation corresponding to the normal game state.
Furthermore, by transitioning to the normal game mode, even if the push order bell role is won in each game, the push order navigation on the main display 8 will no longer be executed.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, if a bonus role is won or if the player wins the lottery to transition to the AT state during a game in the bonus state, the main control unit 10 will generate the AT state after the bonus state ends.

In other words, the main control device 10, which serves as a special game state control means, is equipped with a second special game state control means that can generate a second special game state (AT state) after the end of the first special game state when a second special condition is met (winning the lottery to transition to the AT state) in connection with the occurrence of the first special game state (bonus state).
Therefore, the AT state occurs following the bonus state, which can increase the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, if the AT state is initiated after the bonus state ends, the effects corresponding to the bonus state on the main display 8 that had been executed up until that point will continue to be executed even in the AT state.

In other words, the sub-controller 20, which serves as a special effect control means, enables the first special effect (effect corresponding to the bonus state) to be continuously executed in the second special game state when the second special game state (AT state) is generated by the second special game state control means (main controller 10).
Therefore, even if the game state is changed from the bonus state to the AT state, the game contents can be realized as if the bonus state were extended without the player noticing this, and it is possible to increase interest by providing novel game contents that have never been seen before.

Note that the illustration shows a case where the right to transition to the AT state is granted in a game during the bonus state, but the same effect is also executed when the right to transition to the AT state is granted when a bonus role is won.
In addition, the timing of the lottery to transition to the AT state may be other than the above, for example, when a special pattern combination stops, when the first game in the bonus state starts, or when the final game in the bonus state ends.

Next, various effects during the bonus state in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
Figure 46 shows the effect image on the main display 8 when an effect corresponding to the bonus state (first special effect) is executed, and shows the effect image when the bonus state transitions to the AT state and when the bonus state ends.

The main control unit 10 transmits control information related to the bonus state, such as information that can identify the start and end of the bonus state and information that can identify whether or not there is a right to transition to the AT state, to the sub-control unit 20, and the sub-control unit 20 executes an effect (first special effect) corresponding to the bonus state by displaying various effect images related to the bonus state on the main display 8 based on the received control information.
In addition, in response to the execution of the effect corresponding to the bonus state on the main display 8, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 9 and a predetermined decorative light is output from the lamp 11.

First, as shown in Figure 46 (a), during the bonus state, a bonus state image 60a is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8 to notify that the bonus state is in effect, and an effect corresponding to the bonus state (first special effect) is executed.
The bonus state image 60a can be any image that allows the player to recognize that they are in a bonus state and that increases interest during the bonus state, for example, an introductory image (video) of the characters that appear can be displayed.

Furthermore, in this fifth embodiment, a continuation effect is executed at predetermined intervals, such as when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state reaches 50, 100, or 150, to notify the player whether the bonus state will continue or not.
Therefore, for example, during the execution of a game in which the number of medals paid out during the bonus state reaches 50, a continuation effect image 61a consisting of the text information "Continuation Chance" as shown in Figure 46 (b) is displayed below the bonus state image 60a, and the continuation effect is executed.

If the bonus state has not yet ended and will continue until the next game, as shown in Figure 46(c), a continuation confirmation image 61b consisting of the text information "Continuation Confirmed" will be displayed below the bonus state image 60a at the end of the game, indicating that the bonus state will continue.

On the other hand, when the bonus state ends, as shown in Figure 46 (d), at the end of the game, a bonus end image 61c consisting of the text information "Bonus Ended", a bonus game number image 61d indicating the number of games played during the bonus state ("40G" in the illustration), and a payout medal number image 61e indicating the number of medals paid out during the bonus state ("120" in the illustration) will be displayed in the center of the screen of the main display 8.
At this time, the number of medals actually acquired by the player (net increase in medals) may be displayed.

As mentioned above, during the bonus state, the number of medals paid out or the number of games played during the bonus state are not displayed, so for players who do not fully understand how far into the bonus state they have progressed at the moment, the continuation effect described above will notify them at specified game intervals whether the bonus state will continue or not.
Furthermore, the execution of the continuation effect also prevents the bonus state from ending suddenly, which would reduce the interest of the bonus state.

Also, even when the AT state is entered immediately after the bonus state ends, in games in which the number of medals paid out during the bonus state is the upper limit of 150, the same continuation effect as described above is executed, and after the final game in the bonus state ends, a continuation confirmation image 61b as shown in Figure 46 (c) is displayed below the bonus state image 60a, indicating that the bonus state will continue.
Then, even in the game after the gaming state has shifted to the AT state, the bonus state image 60a continues to be displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display device 8.
However, in this case, although the continuation of the bonus state is notified, the gaming state will actually transition to the AT state from the next game.

In other words, the continuation effect that is executed when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state reaches, for example, 50 or 100, is executed while the bonus state is continuing, whereas the continuation effect that is executed when the number of medals paid out reaches 150 is executed when the game state transitions from the bonus state to the AT state. In this way, even when the bonus state ends, an effect similar to the continuation effect that was executed midway is executed, making it unclear that the game state has transitioned from the bonus state to the AT state.

Furthermore, even after transitioning to the AT state, just as during the bonus state, a continuation effect is executed to notify whether the bonus state (actually the AT state) will continue or not, with the number of medals paid out during the AT state being, for example, 50, 100, 150, etc., paid out at payout intervals of 50 medals.
Therefore, even after the transition from the bonus state to the AT state, the continuation effect continues to be executed at a predetermined game interval, and depending on whether the continuation effect is executed or not and the interval at which it is executed, it becomes unclear whether the state is a bonus state or an AT state at that time.

It is also possible to generate multiple bonus states with different ending conditions, and to set up a bonus state that ends when the number of medals paid out exceeds, for example, 50 or 100, and then execute a continuation effect similar to that described above.
In this way, each branching point at which the bonus state may end corresponds to the time at which the continuation performance is executed, thereby making the continuation performance more interesting.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, a continuation effect is executed during a bonus state to notify players that the bonus state will continue, and the same continuation effect is also executed when transitioning from the bonus state to the AT state.

In other words, the sub-controller 20, which serves as a special effect control means, enables the execution of a continuation effect that can notify the player that the first special game state (bonus state) will continue when the second special game state (AT state) is generated by the second special game state control means (main controller 10).
Therefore, even when the game state changes from a bonus state to an AT state, it is possible to execute the effects during that time without any sense of incongruity, and it is possible to make the player recognize that the bonus state has continued before playing the game.

Furthermore, if the transition to the AT state occurs immediately after the bonus state ends, the same effects that were executed during the bonus state will be executed during the AT state.
In other words, the sub-controller 20, which serves as a special effect control means, enables the first special effect (effect corresponding to the bonus state) to be continuously executed in the second special game state when the second special game state (AT state) is generated by the second special game state control means (main controller 10).
Therefore, even after the transition from the bonus state to the AT state, the player will play the game while recognizing that the bonus state has continued, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game by implementing a novel gameplay that has never been seen before.

Incidentally, by displaying the bonus state image 60a on the main display 8, an effect corresponding to the bonus state as the first special effect is executed, but any effect image may be displayed during the first special effect as long as it allows the player to recognize that he is in a bonus state and increases the interest during the bonus state, and the first special effect may be executed by displaying a still image or a moving image.
Furthermore, although the first special effect is executed on the main display device 8, it may be executed on both the main display device 8 and the sub-display device 17, or it may be executed on the sub-display device 17 alone.

Next, with reference to Figure 47, we will explain the effects during the AT state in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment.

As mentioned above, if the AT state is entered immediately after the bonus state, the effect corresponding to the bonus state (first special effect) will continue to be executed on the main display 8. However, if the AT state continues for a relatively long period of time due to an additional lottery or the like, many players will notice that the bonus state has already ended and they have entered the AT state.
Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of this fifth embodiment, if the AT state that occurs immediately after the bonus state continues for a relatively long period of time, the effect corresponding to the bonus state being executed on the main display 8 (first special effect) is changed to the effect corresponding to the AT state (second special effect).

FIG. 47 shows an effect image on the main display 8 during the AT state, which is an effect image when the duration of the AT state exceeds a predetermined period.
First, as shown in Figure 47 (a), if the AT state immediately after the bonus state is within a predetermined period, as described above, a bonus state image 60a indicating that the bonus state is in effect is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8, and an effect corresponding to the bonus state (first special effect) is executed.

Furthermore, when the number of medals paid out during the AT state is, for example, 50, 100, 150, etc., at payout intervals of 50, a continuation effect image 61a will be displayed below the bonus state image 60a, as described above, and a continuation effect will be executed to notify the player whether the bonus state (actually the AT state) will continue.

Furthermore, the continuation of the AT state is also managed based on the number of medals paid out, just like the bonus state, so even during the AT state, each branching point at which the AT state may end corresponds to the time at which the continuation performance is executed.
In other words, if the continuation of the AT state is managed based on the number of medals (net increase in number) acquired by the player, there is a high possibility that the end of the AT state will occur at a point outside the periodic continuation effect that has been continuously executed since the bonus state, and there is a risk that the player will be aware in advance that the AT state will end when the continuation effect is executed.

If the AT state has not yet ended and continues until the next game, as shown in Figure 47 (b), a continuation confirmation image 61b will be displayed at the bottom of the screen at the end of the game, notifying the player that the bonus state (actually the AT state) will continue.
In addition, a bonus state image 60a is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8.

However, if the continuation effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the third time at 150 coins), an AT state image 60b is displayed in place of the bonus state image 60a, as shown in the figure, so that the player can recognize that the game is in the AT state.
In other words, if the AT state continues for a relatively long period of time, the bonus state image 60a is not displayed, and the AT state image 60b is displayed, thereby changing the presentation corresponding to the bonus state being executed on the main display 8 (first special presentation) to the presentation corresponding to the AT state (second special presentation).

In addition, a remaining medal count image 62a (shown as "100 medals") indicating the number of medals remaining in the AT state is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen of the main display 8, and an executed game count image 62b (shown as "100G") indicating the total number of executed games in the bonus state and the AT state is displayed in the right corner of the screen of the main display 8.
Therefore, if the AT state continues for a relatively long period of time, it will be clearly announced that the current state is the AT state, and the number of remaining medals and the number of games played in the special game state (bonus state and AT state) at that time will be accurately announced.
In subsequent games, the AT state image 60b continues to be displayed, and the remaining medal number image 62a and the number of games played image 62b are updated and displayed based on the progress of the game and the results of the lottery.

On the other hand, when the AT state ends, as shown in Figure 47 (c), at the end of the game, a bonus end image 61c consisting of the text information "Bonus Ended" is displayed in the center of the screen of the main display 8, along with a bonus game number image 61d (shown as "100G") indicating the number of games played during the bonus state and AT state, and a medal payout number image 61e (shown as "250 medals") indicating the number of medals paid out during the bonus state and AT state, thereby announcing the game results during this special game state.
In addition, the number of games in which an AT state other than the bonus state continued, or the number of medals paid out during the AT state may also be displayed.
In addition, the number of medals actually acquired by the player (net increase in medals) may be displayed.

In this way, during the AT state immediately after the bonus state, the number of medals paid out during the bonus state and the number of games played are not displayed, just as during the bonus state. Therefore, for players who do not fully understand how far into the bonus state they have progressed at the moment, the above-mentioned continuation effect will be executed to notify them at predetermined intervals whether the bonus state (actually the AT state) will continue or not.
Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the special game state from ending suddenly due to the execution of the continuation effect, which would reduce the interest of the special game state.

Furthermore, in this fifth embodiment, as mentioned above, a lottery for adding extra medals to the remaining number of medals in the AT state is held in the game during the AT state, so at the time of this extra medal lottery, it is necessary to execute an extra medal display to notify the player that an extra medal lottery has been held and the number of medals that will be added.
On the other hand, since the conditions for ending the bonus state cannot be changed, no additional lottery is held for the number of remaining medals in the bonus state.

Therefore, if an additional lottery is held in a game during the AT state in which the first special effect is being performed, the additional effect will not be performed, and if the number of medals is increased as a result of winning the additional lottery, the number of added medals will not be notified, but will simply be added to the number of remaining medals in the AT state.
If the bonus end image 61c is displayed in this state, it means that there are games remaining equal to the number of unannounced added medals, so in the next game after the bonus end image 61c is displayed, an effect is executed in which the number of remaining medals is added (the so-called post-addition effect), and the special game state continues again.
In this case, the player will notice that the game has transitioned to an AT state due to the addition of the number of medals, so it is preferable to execute an effect corresponding to the AT state (second special effect) in subsequent games.

On the other hand, if an additional lottery is held in a game after the second special effect has started during the AT state, an additional effect corresponding to the additional lottery is held on the main display 8, for example, and if the number of medals is increased as a result of winning the additional lottery, the number of medals added will be added to and displayed in the remaining medal number image 62a.
Furthermore, in a game in which the first special effect is being performed during the AT state, if the player wins the additional lottery and the effect is changed to the second special effect in a subsequent game, the remaining medal number image 62a with the number of additional medals added will be displayed at the time when the remaining medal number image 62a appears.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, when the AT state is entered immediately after the bonus state, if the continuation effect executed in the AT state reaches a predetermined number of times (e.g., three times), that is, if the number of medals paid out during the AT state reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 150 medals), the effect corresponding to the bonus state is changed to the effect corresponding to the AT state.

In other words, when the second special game state (AT state) is generated by the second special game state control means (main control means 10), the sub-controller 20, which serves as a special effect control means, makes it possible to switch from the first special effect (effect corresponding to the bonus state) to the second special effect (effect corresponding to the AT state) when the duration of the second special game state exceeds a predetermined period (when the continuation effect has been executed three times).
Therefore, if the AT state continues for a long period of time, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the game state at that time is an AT state, and it is possible to prevent players who are already aware that they are in an AT state from feeling distrustful.

Furthermore, if an additional lottery is held in a game after the first special effect has been changed to the second special effect, an additional effect corresponding to the additional lottery is executed, for example, on the main display device 8.
In other words, the sub-controller 20, which serves as a special effect control means, is capable of executing an effect (additional effect) corresponding to a specific lottery that can grant a player a specified benefit (additional number of medals) in a game after the first special effect has been switched to the second special effect because the duration of the second special game state (AT state) has exceeded a specified period.

Therefore, if the AT state continues for a long period of time, the player will be notified that they are in the AT state, which means that additional effects that are not performed during the bonus state can be performed without any problems, making the game more interesting and increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

In addition, the conditions for changing from the first special effect to the second special effect may be other than those described above, for example, when the number of games played after transitioning to the AT state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times).
In addition, when the number of remaining medals reaches a predetermined number (for example, 300) or more as a result of an additional lottery during the AT state, the first special effect may be changed to the second special effect. In other words, in this case, since it is determined in advance that the AT state will continue for a long period of time, the effect will be changed to the second special effect even if the AT state has not continued for a long period of time.

In addition, the continuation of the AT state may be managed based on the number of medals (net increase) acquired by the player. In this case, during the execution of the first special effect after the transition to the AT state, it is preferable to execute the continuation effect when the number of medals (net increase) acquired by the player reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50, 100, etc.).
As described above, control is performed when the game machine of the fifth embodiment wins the lottery to transition to the AT state during the bonus state.

[Control when a bonus role is won during the AT state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment]
Next, with reference to Figures 48 to 50, the control when a bonus role is won during the AT state in the gaming machine (slot machine 1) of the fifth embodiment will be described.

First, with reference to Figure 48, we will explain the control that occurs when a bonus role is won in a game during the AT state in which an effect corresponding to the bonus state (first special effect) is being executed in the gaming machine (slot machine 1) of this fifth embodiment.

The timing chart in Figure 48 shows the transition of the game state according to the progress of the game when a bonus role is won in a game during the AT state in which the first special effect is being executed, and the transition of the display content (effect) on the main display 8.
As shown in Figure 48, when a special symbol combination stops in a game in a normal game state (timing t56), the game state is changed from the normal game state to the bonus state, and the presentation on the main display 8, etc. is changed from the presentation in the normal game state to the presentation in the bonus state (first special presentation).
In addition, when the transition to the bonus state results in the winning of the push order bell role in each game, push order navigation is executed on the main display 8.

Then, if the player wins the lottery to transition to the AT state in a game during the bonus state, the game state will transition from the bonus state to the AT state from the game following the final game in the bonus state (timing t57).
Furthermore, even if the game state is changed from the bonus state to the AT state due to control by the sub-controller 20 based on the reception of control information from the main controller 10, the main display 8 will continue to execute the presentation corresponding to the bonus state.
Also, even if the AT state is entered, if the push order bell role is won in each game, push order navigation will be executed on the main display 8, just as in the bonus state.
Therefore, even if the gaming state is shifted from the bonus state to the AT state, the player will continue playing the game without noticing this.

In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the AT state, a lottery for a bonus role is also held in the game during the AT state.
When a bonus role is won in a game during the AT state, the state of winning the bonus role (bonus winning state) is maintained until a special symbol combination (special symbol mode) stops.

In the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, as described above, in a game during a bonus winning state in the AT state, when a bonus role and another role are won at the same time, the main control unit 10 performs priority stop control so that the role other than the bonus role is stopped preferentially.
Furthermore, due to control by the sub-controller 20 based on the reception of control information from the main controller 10, in a game in a bonus winning state in the AT state, the fact that a bonus role has been won will not be notified, and the effects (first special effects) and push order navigation in the bonus state (actually the AT state) will continue to be executed.

Therefore, even if a player wins a bonus role in a game during the AT state, the player will continue playing the game during the AT state without realizing that they have won a bonus role, and as a result, the possibility of transitioning to the bonus state (the special symbol combination stopping) will be extremely low until the AT state ends, so the right to transition to the bonus state will be held until the AT state ends.

Then, when the game that ends the AT state ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state (timing t59), the sub-controller 20, based on control information received from the main controller 10, notifies the player that a bonus combination has been won, and an instruction display to stop the special symbol combination is displayed on the main display 8 along with a display corresponding to the normal game state.

The instruction display for stopping the special symbol combination continues to be executed until the special symbol combination stops, and when the special symbol combination stops, the game state shifts from the game to a bonus state, and the display on the main display 8 etc. is changed from a display corresponding to the normal game state to a display corresponding to the bonus state.
In addition, the push order navigation that was not performed due to the end of the AT state will resume when the state transitions to the bonus state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, during the AT state immediately after the bonus state, effects corresponding to the bonus state are executed, so that even when the state changes to the AT state, it is possible to create a game mode in which the same special game state continues.

Furthermore, if a bonus role is won in a game during the AT state in which the first special effect is being executed, various controls are implemented to prevent the special symbol combination from stopping, making it extremely unlikely that the game will transition to the bonus state (the special symbol combination will stop) until the AT state ends. As a result, the right to transition to the bonus state is maintained until the AT state ends.

In other words, the main control device 10, which serves as a special game state control means, is able to retain the right to generate the first special game state (the right to transition to the bonus state) until the second special game state ends when the first special condition is met (a bonus role is won) during the second special game state (AT state).
Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unnatural game from being played, such as a bonus state occurring again during a bonus state (actually an AT state).

Furthermore, if the right to transition to the bonus state has been granted at the time the AT state ends, an instruction to stop the special symbol combination is executed on the main display 8, making it possible to transition to the bonus state immediately after the AT state ends.

In other words, the sub-controller 20 as a special effect control means is equipped with a post-termination instruction effect control means that is capable of executing an instruction effect that instructs the derivation of a special pattern mode (special pattern combination) if the right to generate the first special game state (right to transition to the bonus state) is held when the second special game state (AT state) ends.
Therefore, it is possible to simulate a game mode in which a bonus state occurs again immediately after the end of the AT state that is presented as a bonus state, resulting in a so-called consecutive bonus state (or one game in a row), thereby greatly increasing the player's sense of expectation.

Furthermore, after the transition to the bonus state again, game control and presentation control during the bonus state, including the lottery for transition to the AT state, are carried out in the same manner as described above, and control related to the bonus state and the AT state is repeatedly executed.
Also, if a bonus role is won during the AT state, a lottery to transition to the AT state will be held, as described above.

During or after the final game of the AT state in which the first special effect is being executed, a display may be executed on the main display 8 to indicate whether or not the right to transition to the bonus state has been granted, and if the right to transition to the bonus state has been granted, the display may result in an announcement that the right to transition to the bonus state has been granted, and if the right to transition to the bonus state has not been granted, the display may result in an announcement that the right to transition to the bonus state has not been granted.
In addition, the above-mentioned effects may be executed as continuous effects over the course of a predetermined number of games until the end of the AT state.

Next, with reference to Figures 49 and 50, we will explain the control that occurs when a bonus role or special replay role is won in a game during the AT state in which an effect corresponding to the AT state (second special effect) is being executed in the gaming machine (slot machine 1) of this fifth embodiment.

First, referring to Figure 49, we will explain what happens when you win a bonus role during the AT state when the second special effect is being performed.

As mentioned above, if the duration of the AT state exceeds a predetermined period (for example, if the number of medals paid out exceeds 150), for example, the main display 8 will change from the effect corresponding to the bonus state that had been executed up until then (first special effect) to the effect corresponding to the AT state (second special effect) and execute it.
In addition, in a game during the normal game state, a lottery for transition to the AT state is also held, so even if this transition lottery is won and the game transitions directly from the normal game state to the AT state, the second special effect will be executed from the beginning of the AT state.

As mentioned above, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, if a bonus role is won during the AT state in which the first special effect is being performed, the right to transition to the bonus state is maintained until the AT state ends. However, if a bonus role is won during the AT state in which the second special effect is being performed, the bonus state can be transitioned from that point onwards.

Therefore, if a bonus combination is won during the AT state in which the second special effect is being performed, an instruction effect to stop the special symbol combination from that game is executed by the main display 8, etc., making it possible to transition to the bonus state in the middle of the AT state without waiting for the AT state to end.

Figure 49 shows the effect image on the main display 8 when a bonus role is won during the AT state in which the second special effect is being performed.
In addition, various performance images on the main display 8 are displayed by the sub-controller 20 based on the reception of control information from the main controller 10.

First, as shown in Figure 49 (a), if the duration of the AT state immediately after the bonus state exceeds a predetermined period, or if the game transitions directly from the normal game state to the AT state, an AT state image 60b is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8 to notify that the game is in the AT state, and an effect corresponding to the AT state (second special effect) is executed.
In addition, a remaining medal count image 62a (shown as "100 medals") indicating the number of medals remaining in the AT state is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen of the main display 8, and an executed game count image 62b (shown as "100G") indicating the total number of executed games in the bonus state and the AT state is displayed in the right corner of the screen of the main display 8.

Then, as shown in Figure 49 (b), when a bonus role is won in a game during the AT state in which the second special effect is being executed, the sub-controller 20, based on the control information received from the main controller 10, controls the lower part of the AT state image 60b on the screen of the main display 8 to display, as special operation information, a pattern instruction image 52a consisting of the text information "Aim for 7" which prompts the player to stop a special pattern combination (special pattern form "7-7-7"), and an operation instruction image 52b which indicates that the stop operation sequence (stop direction) of the reel 4 should be reversed ("5c → 5b → 5a"), side by side in the left-right direction, and an instruction effect to stop the special pattern combination is executed.
In the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the bonus role can be won alone, so in a game in which the bonus role is won, a special symbol combination can be stopped on reel 4, and an instruction effect will be executed during the game.

In addition, the main control unit 10 manages the duration of the AT state, etc., and is therefore able to determine whether the effect during the AT state on the main display 8, etc. is the first special effect or the second special effect, and when the second special effect is being performed, control information is sent to the sub-control unit 20 at the time a bonus role is won to execute an instruction effect to stop the special pattern combination.
In addition, if the stop operation is appropriate, the special symbol combination will stop regardless of the stop operation order, but in the instruction effect, the operation instruction image 52b is displayed to notify (instruct) that the stop operation order of the reels 4 should be reversed ("5c → 5b → 5a"). This is to make it indistinguishable from the winning of the special replay role described later.

As shown in Figure 49(c), when the player stops reel 4 according to the instructions, a special symbol combination of 7 symbols 54a will stop on the pay line (middle line) of each reel 4.

Furthermore, when a special symbol combination stops on reel 4, an addition result image 62 containing numerical information of "+150 medals" is displayed at the bottom of the screen of main display 8 to notify that medals have been added (added) to the number of remaining medals in the AT state, and an addition effect (a bonus award effect) is executed.
At this time, the number of medals notified by the additional result image 62 is the number of medals that determines the duration of the bonus state.

Then, when the special symbol combination stops, the game state is changed from the AT state to the bonus state in the subsequent games.
In other words, the game state is changed to the bonus state in the middle of the AT state.
In addition, even if the instruction effect is performed, there may be cases where the special symbol combination cannot be stopped, in which case the instruction effect will continue to be executed in the subsequent games. However, various information related to the execution of the game during this time will be irrelevant to the continuation management of the AT state.

In the slot machine 1 of this fifth embodiment, if the game state is changed to the bonus state during the AT state in which an effect corresponding to the AT state (second special effect) is being executed, the second special effect on the main display 8 continues to be executed.
Therefore, although not shown in the figure, even in games after the change to the bonus state, the game in the bonus state is executed with the AT state image 60b, the remaining medal count image 62a, and the number of games played image 62b continuing to be displayed on the main display 8, and the remaining medal count image 62a and the number of games played image 62b are updated and displayed according to the progress of the game and the results of the lottery.

At the start of the bonus state, the remaining medal number image 62a will be displayed with the number of medals displayed in the added result image 62 added to it.
However, since the continuation management of the bonus state and the AT state is carried out separately, the number of remaining medals displayed in the remaining medal number image 62a indicates the possible continuation period of the pseudo AT state, which is the sum of the number of remaining medals in each of the bonus state and the AT state.

In other words, if the game state changes to the bonus state during the AT state while the second special effect is being executed, the second special effect will continue to be executed even during the bonus state. Therefore, when a special symbol combination stops in a game during the AT state, a predetermined number of medals (150 medals, which determines the duration of the bonus state) are added to the remaining medal count in the AT state, and an effect is executed as if the possible duration of the AT state had been extended.

When the bonus state ends, the game state is changed from the bonus state to the AT state, and the AT state that was in effect when the transition to the bonus state ended is restored.
Furthermore, even when the AT state is restored, the AT state image 60b, the remaining medal count image 62a, and the number of games played image 62b on the main display 8 continue to be displayed, the game in the AT state is played again, and the remaining medal count image 62a and the number of games played image 62b are updated and displayed according to the progress of the game and the results of the lottery.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, if a bonus role is won in a game during the AT state in which the second special effect is being executed, an instruction effect is executed at that time (during the AT state) to stop the special pattern combination.
In other words, the sub-control device 20 as a special effect control means is equipped with an intermediate instruction effect control means that is capable of executing an instruction effect that instructs the derivation of a special pattern mode (special pattern combination) during the second special game state (AT state) when the first special condition is met (a bonus role is won) during the second special game state.

Furthermore, when a special symbol combination stops on reel 4 as a result of the execution of the above instruction effect, a bonus state is generated, and an additional effect is executed to notify that the duration of the AT state will be extended by the duration of this bonus state.
In other words, the sub-controller 20 as a special effect control means is equipped with a bonus-granting effect control means that is capable of executing a bonus-granting effect (additional effect) that can notify that a bonus related to an extension of the duration of the second special game state has been granted, based on the fact that a special pattern pattern has been derived during the second special game state.

Therefore, when a bonus role is won in a game during the AT state in which the second special effect is being executed, an effect is executed as if the duration of the AT state has been extended, which can increase the player's sense of expectation.
Furthermore, if a bonus role is won in a game during the AT state, the presentation related to the bonus state will be changed depending on the presentation state at that time (first special presentation or second special presentation), and the progress of the game state will be changed, making it possible to make the game more diverse and to increase the interest of the game.

It is possible to transition to the bonus state multiple times during a single AT state, and in this case, the same instruction effects and additional effects as above will be executed when each bonus role is won.

Next, referring to Figure 50, we will explain what happens when you win a special replay during an AT state in which a performance corresponding to the AT state (second special performance) is being performed.

In the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, when a rare role is won in a game during the AT state, an additional lottery is held to add a predetermined number of medals to the number of remaining medals in the AT state.
The above rare roles also include special replay roles, so if you win a special replay role, an additional lottery will be held.

In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay role are set as "replay replay replay", "replay bell bell", and "bell replay bell".
Reel 4 is controlled to stop so that when a normal replay role (a replay role other than a rare role) is won, "Replay Replay Replay" can be stopped on the valid line, when a chance replay role (rare role) is won, "Replay Bell Bell" can be stopped on the valid line, and when a special replay role (rare role) is won, "Replay Replay Replay" or "Bell Replay Bell" can be stopped on the valid line.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, in a game in which a special replay role is won, if the right reel 4c is stopped first (if the reel 4 is stopped by a special operation such as a reverse push or irregular push), the "bell, replay, bell" symbol combination will stop on an active line, and if any other reel 4 is stopped first, the reel 4 stopping control is performed so that the "replay, replay, replay" symbol combination will stop on an active line, just as when a normal replay role is won.

In addition, in a game in which a special replay role is won, if the additional lottery is won, a reverse push instruction effect is displayed on the main display 8, and if the additional lottery is not won, a reverse push instruction effect is not displayed on the main display 8.

Figure 50 shows the effect image on the main display 8 when a special replay role is won during the AT state in which the second special effect is being performed.
In addition, various performance images on the main display 8 are displayed by the sub-controller 20 based on the reception of control information from the main controller 10.

First, as shown in Figure 50 (a), if the duration of the AT state immediately after the bonus state exceeds a predetermined period, or if the game transitions directly from the normal game state to the AT state, an AT state image 60b is displayed in the main part of the screen of the main display 8 to notify that the game is in the AT state, and an effect corresponding to the AT state (second special effect) is executed.
In addition, a remaining medal count image 62a (shown as "100 medals") indicating the number of medals remaining in the AT state is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen of the main display 8, and an executed game count image 62b (shown as "100G") indicating the total number of executed games in the bonus state and the AT state is displayed in the right corner of the screen of the main display 8.

As shown in Figure 50(b), if a special replay role is won and an additional lottery is won in a game in which the second special effect is being executed (while reel 4 is spinning), the sub-controller 20, based on control information received from the main controller 10, controls the main display 8 to display special operation information below the AT state image 60b on its screen. The special operation information displayed below the AT state image 60b is a pattern instruction image 52a consisting of the text information "Aim for 7" to prompt the player to stop a special symbol combination (the special symbol pattern "7-7-7"), and an operation instruction image 52b indicating that the stop operation sequence (stop direction) of reel 4 should be reversed ("5c → 5b → 5a"). Then, an instruction effect to stop the special symbol combination is executed.

In other words, if the additional lottery is won when a special replay role is won in a game in which the AT state image 60b is displayed, the same instruction effect as when the bonus role described above is won (see Figure 49 (b)) will be executed.

As shown in Figure 50(c), when the player stops reel 4 according to the instructions, a bell symbol 54c will stop in the middle of the left reel 4a, a replay symbol 54b will stop in the middle of the middle reel 4b, and a bell symbol 54c will stop in the middle of the right reel 4c, forming a "bell-replay-bell" symbol combination on the active line (middle line) of reel 4 and resulting in a special replay winning combination.

In the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the arrangement of the symbols on each reel 4 is set so that, as shown in the figure, a bell symbol 54c is arranged above the 7 symbol 54a on the left reel 4a, a replay symbol 54b is arranged above the 7 symbol 54a on the middle reel 4b, and a bell symbol 54c is arranged above the 7 symbol 54a on the right reel 4c.
Therefore, when the "bell replay bell" symbol combination stops on the active line (on the middle line) by performing the stopping operation according to the instructions, the "7 7 7" symbol combination will stop on the lower line (the line connecting the symbols on the lower row of each reel 4), which is not an active line.

In other words, when the player performs the stopping operation on reel 4 according to the instructions to stop the special symbol combination, the special symbol combination will not stop on the active line, but when the symbol combination of "bell replay bell" stops on the active line, the special symbol combination will stop on the lower line.
If the reel 4 is stopped by pressing the reel in reverse, but the pressing operation is inappropriate (inaccurate), a symbol other than the 7 symbol 54a will stop on the lower row of the specified reel 4, and the symbol combination "bell replay bell" will stop on the valid line.

When the "Bell Replay Bell" pattern combination stops on reel 4, an addition result image 62 containing numerical information of "+50 medals" is displayed at the bottom of the screen of main display 8 to notify that medals have been added (added) to the number of remaining medals in the AT state, and an addition effect (bonus award effect) is executed.
The numerical information displayed in the addition result image 62 changes depending on the number of medals added.

Therefore, an additional effect is executed as if the number of medals has been increased by stopping a special symbol combination.
Although not shown in the figure, at the start of the next game, the remaining medal number image 62a is updated to show the added number of medals, and the game is executed in the AT state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, if a special replay role is won during the AT state in which a performance corresponding to the AT state is being performed, and if the player wins the additional lottery at that time, an instruction performance similar to that when a bonus role is won (when the bonus state is transitioned to) is executed even though the bonus role is not won, and when the stop button 5 is operated to stop the reel 4 according to the instruction performance, a special pattern combination corresponding to the special replay role stops on the active line, and at the same time, a special pattern combination stops on the lower line.
Then, in response to the stopping of a symbol combination corresponding to the special replay role, an additional effect is performed on the main display 8.

In other words, the sub-controller 20, which serves as the bonus-granting effect control means, makes it possible to execute a bonus-granting effect (additional effect) when a special symbol pattern (special symbol combination) is derived outside the pay area on the variable display means (reel 4), even if the first special condition (winning a bonus role) is not met.

As a result, it is possible to create an additional effect that makes it seem as if the number of medals has been increased by stopping a special symbol combination, making it possible to clearly notify the player that they have won the additional lottery and further increasing the player's sense of satisfaction.

Furthermore, by making the additional effect common when a special replay role is won and when the bonus state is transitioned to, it is possible to make the player perceive that a predetermined number of medals have been added to the remaining number of medals in the AT state, just as when a special replay role is won, when the bonus state is transitioned to.
In other words, the additional effect when transitioning to the bonus state does not actually add to the number of remaining medals in the AT state, but rather makes it appear as if the number of remaining medals granted by transitioning to the bonus state is added to the number of remaining medals in the AT state, but it is possible to make the player perceive that an addition has actually been made to the number of remaining medals in the AT state even when transitioning to the bonus state.

In addition, when a special replay role is won, the combination of symbols that stops on the valid line when reel 4 is stopped by pressing it in reverse can be other than those mentioned above, as long as a special combination of symbols stops on the lower line.
In addition, when the "Bell Replay Bell" symbol combination stops, a special symbol combination is stopped on the lower line, but the special symbol combination may be stopped on any line other than the effective line.
As described above, control is performed when a bonus role is won during the AT state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment.

The slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment has been described above, but the bonus state and the AT state may be of the game number management type as long as the management type is the same.
In addition, after changing to the effect corresponding to the AT state (second special effect), in some cases when the bonus state is won, the effect corresponding to the bonus state (first special effect) may be executed.
In addition, in some cases where a bonus state is won during an AT state that has been directly transitioned from a normal gaming state, an effect corresponding to the bonus state (first special effect) may be executed.

In addition, at the end of a series of special game states (bonus state or AT state), the number of times the bonus state was won during that period may be displayed as a result display, thereby providing the player with an element for estimating the setting value in the probability setting device 14.
In addition, in the case of a bonus state in which the right to transition to the AT state is clearly granted when a bonus role is won, such as when transitioning to the bonus state due to a double win with a special role (for example, a middle cherry role) that has an extremely low probability of winning, an effect corresponding to the AT state may be immediately executed after the bonus state ends.
The slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment is configured as described above.

As explained above, in the present invention, a gaming machine (slot machine 1) that executes a game based on the player's operation and can generate a special gaming state (pseudo bonus state) advantageous to the player in connection with the execution of the game comprises a lottery means (main control unit 10) that can execute a lottery for the granting of a benefit (role, CZ state, pseudo bonus state, etc.) based on the execution of the game, a special gaming state right granting means (main control unit 10) that can grant a special right (right to transition to the pseudo bonus state) to generate the special gaming state based on the lottery result of the lottery means, a game result derivation means (main control unit 10) that can derive a special result (special symbol combination) as the result of the game when a special operation (reverse push) is performed by the player in a game in which the lottery result of the lottery means is the first lottery result (winning a special replay role), and The system is equipped with a notification control means (sub-controller 20) that can notify special operation information (symbol indication image 52a, operation instruction image 52b) for deriving the special result when the special right is granted by the special game state right granting means in a game that has resulted in one lottery result, and a special game state control means (main controller 10) that can control the game state to the special game state based on the special result being derived by the game result derivation means, wherein the special game state right granting means can grant the special right based on the lottery result of the lottery means being a second lottery result (winning a rare role) that is different from the first lottery result, and the notification control means is configured to wait to notify the special operation information until the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the first lottery result when the special right is granted by the special game state right granting means based on the derivation of the second lottery result.

Therefore, in a game in which the lottery result is the first lottery result, if the game is progressed in accordance with the special operation information, a special result will be derived when the special game state starts, so that the player can be sure to recognize the start of the special game state.
Furthermore, when the lottery result is the second lottery result and a special right is granted, notification of special operation information is put on hold, thereby creating a game mode in which the game does not immediately transition to a special game state, making it possible to further diversify the game.

Furthermore, even when a transition to a special game state is made, the transition to the special game state is made triggered by the derivation of a special result, so that the player can be sure to recognize that a transition to a special game state is being made.
Furthermore, since the special result is derived from the player's game-related operations, the special game state occurs in the same manner as a so-called real bonus, making it possible to give the player even more enjoyment.

The lottery means, special game state right granting means, game result derivation means, notification control means, and special game state control means may be provided by the main control unit 10 or the sub-control unit 20. They may also be configured through cooperation between the main control unit 10 and the sub-control unit 20.

The system is also configured with a specific gaming state control means (main control unit 10) that can control the special gaming state (CZ state) to a specific gaming state in which the probability of the special right being granted by the special gaming state right granting means is increased based on the establishment of predetermined conditions.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the granting of a special right due to the occurrence of a specific gaming state.
The specific game state control means may be provided in the main control device 10 or in the sub-control device 20. Alternatively, the specific game state control means may be configured by the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 working together.

The device is also configured to include a performance control means (sub-controller 20) that can execute a premonition performance based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being the second lottery result.
Therefore, if the lottery result is the second lottery result, a premonition effect will be executed, which can increase the interest in the game and also increase the player's sense of expectation.
The performance control means may be provided in the main control device 10 or the sub-control device 20. Alternatively, the performance control means may be configured by the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 working together.

The system is also configured to include a bonus lottery means (main control device 10) that can execute a lottery to award a specific bonus (a pseudo-bonus state with 50 consecutive games) in games after the special right based on the second lottery result has been awarded by the special game state right awarding means.

Therefore, even if the second lottery result is derived again after the lottery result has become the second lottery result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied and to increase the player's sense of expectation.
The bonus lottery means may be provided in the main control device 10 or the sub-control device 20. Alternatively, the bonus lottery means may be configured by the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 working together.

The system also includes a main control device (10) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control device (20) capable of executing control related to the effects based on control information from the main control device. The notification control means is provided in the sub-control device, and when the special right is granted by the special game state right granting means in a game in which the lottery result of the lottery means is the first lottery result, the notification control means is configured to be able to notify the special operation information based on receiving special control information from the main control device, and when the special right is granted by the special game state right granting means based on deriving the second lottery result, the system is configured to be able to notify the special operation information without receiving the special control information (control information instructing the execution of an instruction effect) from the main control device.

This reduces the processing burden on each control device when announcing special operation information, making it possible to more efficiently and reliably announce special operation information.

The notification control means is also configured to notify the special operation information with a predetermined probability in a game in which the result of the lottery by the lottery means is not the first lottery result, and is equipped with notification change control means (sub-control device 20) that can change the predetermined probability based on the player's operation.

Therefore, the probability of notifying special operation information can be changed according to the player's preference, making it possible to play a game that satisfies many players.
The notification change control means may be provided in the main control device 10 or the sub-control device 20. Alternatively, the notification change control means may be configured by the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 working together.

On the other hand, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine in which a lottery is held for a small win or a specific game state based on the execution of a game, and the lottery result is notified on a display device.
However, conventional gaming machines have not been sufficient in terms of increasing the entertainment value of the game or enhancing the player's sense of anticipation.
In this way, the slot machine 1 of the present invention can solve all or part of the problems that need to be improved in conventional gaming machines.

The above describes a preferred embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, but it goes without saying that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the present invention.
For example, in this embodiment, the AT state (AT) is granted as a benefit, but ART or RT may also be granted.

In addition, in this embodiment, the AT state type is a type that can continue multiple times, with the AT state being executed in units of a specified number of games, but it may also be a type that ends when there are no more games remaining in the AT state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect button 2d and upper effect button 2f are used as examples of effect operation means, but other means that output an input signal when operated by the player may be used, such as the bet button 2a, stop button 5, start lever 3, etc.

In addition, a vibration means may be provided on the front door 1a to vibrate the front door 1a by activating a motor, speaker, etc., and the vibration means may be activated during various effects such as premonition effects and battle effects, or at specified times during the added-on specialized zone, in order to increase the player's sense of anticipation.
In addition, a ventilation means may be provided on the front door 1a to blow air towards the player, and the ventilation means may be activated during various effects such as premonition effects and battle effects, or at specified times during the added-on specialization zone, in order to increase the player's sense of anticipation.

In addition, a main display 8 and a sub-display 17 are provided as display means, but various effects such as premonition effects, battle effects, and the various effects in the bonus-specialized zone may be executed on either one of the display means, or on both of the two display means.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the main control unit 10 performed operations as various means such as lottery means, but the sub-control unit 20 can also perform some or all of these operations and operate as various means.
Conversely, the main control unit 10 can perform some or all of the operations executed by the sub-control unit 20, and the main control unit 10 can operate as various means.

Furthermore, although the present invention is applied to a slot machine, it can also be applied to other gaming machines such as pachinko (for example, ball slot).
The present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed gaming machines that can play games using pseudo gaming media in data format, without using actual gaming media such as medals or gaming balls.

1: Slot machine 2: Bet button 2d: Effect button 4: Reels 5: Stop button 8: Main display 10: Main control device 17: Sub display 20: Sub control device

Claims (3)

a lottery means capable of deriving any one of a plurality of lottery results including a first lottery result , a second lottery result, and a third lottery result ;
In the game in which a game value can be awarded, a variable display means is provided which can statically display the variable display of the identification information in a manner based on the lottery result derived by the lottery means;
a control means for executing the main game after executing a pseudo game in which the game value cannot be awarded when the second lottery result is derived in a predetermined game;
A performance execution means for executing any one of a plurality of performances when the identification information is not statically displayed by the variable display means;
Equipped with
The control means
In a specific game, when the first lottery result is derived, the game can be executed;
In the specific game, when the third lottery result is derived, the main game can be executed;
The performance execution means
During the pseudo game of the predetermined game and in a state where the identification information is not stopped and displayed by the variable display means, it is possible to execute any one of a plurality of effects including a first effect corresponding to the first lottery result and a third effect corresponding to the third lottery result,
During the pseudo game of the predetermined game and in a state where the identification information is not stopped and displayed by the variable display means, the second performance corresponding to the second lottery result cannot be executed,
During the main game of the predetermined game and in a state where the identification information is not stopped and displayed by the variable display means, a second performance corresponding to the second lottery result can be executed;
During the main game of the specific game in which the first lottery result is derived , and in a state in which the identification information is not stopped and displayed by the variable display means, a first performance corresponding to the first lottery result can be executed ;
During the main game of the specific game in which the third lottery result has been derived, and in a state in which the identification information is not displayed in a static manner by the variable display means, a third performance corresponding to the third lottery result can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by: The performance execution means
During the pseudo game of the predetermined game, and in a state where the identification information is not stopped and displayed by the variable display means, when a first performance corresponding to the first lottery result is executed, a third performance corresponding to the third lottery result is not executed during the pseudo game,
When a third effect corresponding to the third lottery result is executed during the pseudo game of the predetermined game and in a state where the identification information is not displayed in a stopped state by the variable display means, the first effect corresponding to the first lottery result is not executed during the pseudo game.
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1 . The performance execution means
During the pseudo game of the predetermined game and in a state where the identification information is not displayed in a stopped state by the variable display means, the third effect corresponding to the third lottery result can be executed with a higher probability than the first effect corresponding to the first lottery result.
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.